NEC Univerge SV9100 Programming Manual Download Page 615 | Manualshive

Page: 615 / 954

background image

Issue 4.0

SV9100 Programming Manual

2-575

12

Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout

Attempts

(Notify RNA Intvl)

Set the time SV8100 InMail waits, after it dials
an unanswered non-pager callout destination,
before retrying the callout number.
There are 3 types of unanswered non-pager
callouts:



If the callout rings the destination longer

than the 47-01-13: Wait for Answer Non-

Pager Callout Attempts option.



If the destination answers, says Hello (or

the system detects answer supervision)

and then hangs up without dialing 1 to log

onto their mailbox. This typically happens if

someone unfamiliar with notification

answers the callout, or if the callout is

picked up by an answering machine.



If the destination answers and then hangs

up without saying Hello. This typically

happens if someone unfamiliar with the

notification answers the callout (like the

above example), or if the call is picked up

by an answering machine with insufficient

outgoing message volume.

1~255 (min)

30

13

Number of RNA Rings

(Notify RNA Rings)
If a non-pager callout rings the destination
longer than this number of rings, SV8100 InMail
marks the call as unanswered (Ring No
Answer) and hangs up.

1~99 (rings)

5

14

Number of Cascading Attempts

(Notify Call Attmpt)
With Cascade Pager Notification: Set how
many times a mailbox’s  enabled pager
notification destinations are tried.  For example
if 47-01-14 is set to 10 and a mailbox has 5
enabled pager destinations and each
destination has 3 retires for BNA/RNA (47-20-
06 and 47-20-07).  The InMail will call each
destination 3 times, and will retry all the
enabled destinations 10 times. This means
each enabled destination will be called a total
of 30 times (10 x 3).
With Normal Pager Notification: Set how  many
attempts SV9100 InMail retries an incomplete
Message Notification callout. This total includes
unacknowledged callouts, callouts to a busy
destination, and callouts to an unanswered
destination. This option applies to pager and
non-pager callouts.

1~99 (attempts)

1

Input Data (Continued)

Item

No.

Item

Input Data

Default

«
...
613
614
615
616
617
...
»

Summary of Contents for Univerge SV9100

Page 1: ...Programming Manual NDA 31579 Issue 4 0 Version 5000 SV9100 ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...tained herein is the property of NEC Corporation of America and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Corporation of America Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation UNIVERGE is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Copyright 2016 NEC Corporation of America 3929 W John Carpenter Freeway Irving TX 75063...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...al The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer This manual has detailed instructions for installing the SV9100 chassis blades multiline terminals and optional equipment UNIVERGE SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual This manual provides detailed information for each of the system features If you are not familiar with the features the Table of Contents lists each of the feat...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ... Tone Circuit Setup 2 22 10 12 GCD CP10 Network Setup 2 24 10 13 In DHCP Server Setup 2 28 10 14 Managed Network Setup 2 29 10 15 Client Information Setup 2 30 10 16 Option Information Setup 2 31 10 17 H 323 Gatekeeper Setup 2 35 10 18 H 323 Alias Address Setup 2 36 10 19 VoIP DSP Resource Selection 2 37 10 20 LAN Setup for External Equipment 2 38 10 21 GCD CP10 Hardware Setup 2 40 10 23 SIP Syste...

Page 8: ... Setup 2 68 10 48 License Activation 2 69 10 49 License File Activation 2 70 10 50 License Information 2 71 10 51 PRI T1 Selection of CD PRTA 2 76 10 52 Free Demo License Information 2 77 10 54 License Configuration for Each Package 2 78 10 55 Package Network Setup 2 79 10 56 XML Portal IP Phone 2 81 10 58 DT800 DT700 Network Setup 2 82 10 62 NetBIOS Setting 2 83 10 65 NTP Server 2 84 10 67 SIP St...

Page 9: ...1 17 Group Pilot Number 2 132 11 19 Remote Conference Group Pilot Number 2 133 11 20 Dial Extension Analyze Table 2 134 Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 01 Night Mode Function Setup 2 135 12 02 Automatic Night Service Patterns 2 136 12 03 Weekly Night Service Switching 2 138 12 04 Holiday Night Service Switching 2 140 12 05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions 2 141 12 06 Night Mode Group Assi...

Page 10: ... 13 CCIS System Route ID 2 178 14 14 CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment 2 179 14 18 IP Trunk Data Setup 2 180 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 01 Basic Extension Data Setup 2 183 15 02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup 2 186 15 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 2 195 15 05 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup 2 199 15 06 Trunk Access Map for Extensions 2 205 15 07 Programmable Function Keys...

Page 11: ...xtensions 2 243 16 03 Secondary Department Group 2 244 16 04 Call Restriction Between Department Groups 2 245 Program 20 System Option Setup 20 01 System Options 2 247 20 02 System Options for Multiline Telephones 2 249 20 03 System Options for Single Line Telephones 2 252 20 04 System Options for Virtual Extensions 2 254 20 06 Class of Service for Extensions 2 255 20 07 Class of Service Options A...

Page 12: ...2 298 20 34 Remote Conference Group Setting 2 302 20 35 Extension s Operator Setting 2 304 20 36 Trunk s Operator Setting 2 305 20 37 Operator Extension Group Setup 2 306 20 38 Operator Group Setting 2 307 20 44 Watch Mode Setup 2 308 20 45 Remote Watch Setup 2 309 20 46 Security Sensor Setup 2 310 20 47 Time Pattern Setting for Watch Mode 2 312 20 48 Time Pattern Setting for Security Sensor 2 313...

Page 13: ...sion 2 345 21 11 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment 2 346 21 12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks 2 347 21 13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions 2 348 21 14 Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup 2 349 21 15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 2 350 21 16 Trunk Group Routing for Networking 2 351 21 17 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk 2 352 21 18 ...

Page 14: ...t Area Setup 2 385 22 17 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern 2 386 22 18 Private Call Assignment Setup 2 387 22 20 Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup 2 388 Program 23 Answer Features Setup 23 02 Call Pickup Groups 2 389 23 03 Universal Answer Auto Answer 2 390 23 04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions 2 392 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 01 System Options for Hold 2...

Page 15: ...SA Attendant Message Service Setup 2 421 25 18 VRS DISA Attendant Message Timer Setup 2 423 Program 26 ARS Service 26 01 Automatic Route Selection Service 2 425 26 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR 2 427 26 03 ARS Dial Treatments 2 429 26 04 ARS Class of Service 2 431 26 05 LCR Carrier Table 2 432 26 06 LCR Authorization Code Table 2 433 26 07 LCR Cost Center Code Table 2 434 26 08 LCR Manual Ove...

Page 16: ... Door Box and Sensor Setup 32 01 Door Box Timers Setup 2 467 32 02 Door Box Ring Assignment 2 468 32 03 Door Box Basic Setup 2 469 32 04 Door Box Name Setup 2 470 Program 33 CTA and ACI Setup 33 01 ACI Port Type Setup 2 471 33 02 ACI Department Calling Group 2 472 Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 01 E M Tie Line Basic Setup 2 473 34 02 E M Tie Line Class of Service 2 475 34 03 Trunk Group Routing for ...

Page 17: ... 2 503 41 03 Incoming Ring Group Assignment for Group 2 504 41 04 Group Supervisor 2 506 41 05 Agent Work Schedules 2 507 41 06 Trunk Work Schedules 2 508 41 07 Weekly Schedule Setup 2 509 41 08 Overflow Options 2 510 41 09 Overflow Table Setting 2 512 41 10 ACI Delay Announcement 2 513 41 11 VRS Delay Announcement 2 514 41 12 Night Announcement Setup 2 516 41 13 VRS Message Number for Night Annou...

Page 18: ...ptions for ARS F Route 2 549 44 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access 2 550 44 03 Dial Analysis Extension Table 2 552 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule 2 554 44 05 ARS F Route Table 2 555 44 06 Additional Dial Table 2 557 44 07 Gain Table for ARS F Route Access 2 558 44 08 Time Schedule for ARS F Route 2 560 44 09 Weekly Schedule for ARS F Route 2 562 44 10 Holiday Schedule for...

Page 19: ...cation 2 623 47 21 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options 2 625 47 22 Group Mailbox Notification Options 2 627 47 23 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options 2 629 Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 01 CCIS System Setting 2 631 50 02 Connecting System Settings 2 632 50 03 CCIS Destination System Settings 2 634 50 04 CCIS Office Code Assignment 2 635 50 05 CCIS Maximum Cal...

Page 20: ...ary NetLink Setting 2 658 51 09 NetLink Communication Port Settings 2 659 51 10 Virtual Slot Setting 2 661 51 11 NetLink System Information 2 662 51 12 Primary System Information 2 663 51 13 NetLink Options 2 664 51 14 NetLink System Control 2 665 51 15 Demonstration Setting 2 666 51 16 NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting 2 667 51 17 NetLink DT80 DT700 Server Individual Information Setup ...

Page 21: ...ODEC QSLAC Filter Setting 2 714 81 14 DIOPU LD Trunk CODEC QSLAC Filter Data Setup 2 717 81 15 TLIU 2W CODEC QSLAC Filter Data Setup 2 720 81 16 TLIU 4W CODEC QSLAC Filter Data Setup 2 723 81 17 CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup 2 726 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 01 Incoming Ring Tone 2 727 82 03 DSS Console LED Pattern Setup 2 730 82 04 LCA Initial Data Setup 2 732 82 05 ISD...

Page 22: ...p 2 776 84 21 CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup 2 777 84 22 DT800 DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup 2 780 84 23 DT800 DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup 2 782 84 24 DT800 DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup 2 784 84 25 NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup 2 787 84 26 IPL Basic Setup 2 790 84 27 IPL Basic Setup 2 791 84 28 DT800 DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup 2 7...

Page 23: ...1 90 17 Firmware Information 2 842 90 19 Dial Block Release 2 843 90 20 Traffic Report Data Setup 2 844 90 21 Traffic Report Output 2 846 90 23 Deleting Registration of IP Telephones 2 847 90 24 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup 2 848 90 25 System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup 2 849 90 26 Program Access Level Setup 2 850 90 28 User Programming Password Setup 2 851 90 31 DIM Access over Ethe...

Page 24: ...rogramming 2 874 90 55 Free License Select 2 875 90 56 NTP Setup 2 876 90 57 Backup Recovery Data 2 877 90 58 Restore Recovery Data 2 878 90 59 Delete Recovery Data 2 879 90 60 T1 ISDN Layer Status Information 2 880 90 61 Manual Slot Install 2 881 90 62 Security ID Information 2 882 90 63 DT800 DT700 Control 2 883 90 64 SNMP Setup 2 884 90 65 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup 2 885 90 68...

Page 25: ...elete Command 2 903 Program 93 System Information 93 01 Day Night Mode Information 3 905 93 02 Trunk Information 3 906 93 03 Extension Information 3 907 93 04 Redial List 3 910 93 05 Department Group Information 3 911 93 06 IP Address List for 1st Party CTI Connection 3 912 ...

Page 26: ...xx Table of Contents Issue 4 0 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 27: ... 193 Table 2 5 Program 15 02 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns 2 194 Table 2 6 Program 15 08 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns 2 217 Table 2 7 Keys for Entering Names 2 280 Table 2 8 Program 22 03 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns 2 363 Table 2 9 Keys for Entering Names 2 374 Table 2 10 ED Patterns for DSS Console 2 452 Table 2 11 Keys for Entering Names 2 455 Table 2 12 Keys for Entering Names...

Page 28: ...xxii List of Tables Issue 4 0 Table 2 19 Ring Cycle Table 2 691 Table 2 20 Default Table 2 694 ...

Page 29: ...are also included When you first install the system it uses the Default Setting for all programs Along with the Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special considerations that may apply to the program The reverse type white on black just beneath the Description heading is the program access level You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level t...

Page 30: ...g programmed with the entry of 01 The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right depending on which arrow is pressed To learn how to enter the programming mode refer to Section 3 How to Enter Programming Mode below SECTION 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE To enter programming mode 1 Go to any working display telephone In a newly installed system use extension port 1 2 Do not lift ...

Page 31: ...e USB Drive Program 90 04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary Note that a USB Drive can only hold one customer database Each database to be saved requires a separate drive Password User Name Level Programs at this Level 47544 necii 1 MF Manufacturer MF All programs 12345678 tech 2 IN Installation IN All programs in this section not listed below for SA and SB 0000 ADMIN1 3 SA System Ad...

Page 32: ...splay allowing you to enter any program number MIC Switch between the different input data fields by pressing MIC The cursor moves up to the top row of the display Pressing MIC again moves the cursor back to the middle row LINE KEYS Use pre programmed settings to help with the program entry These settings vary between programs from LINE 1 0 off and LINE 2 1 on to preset values for timers where LIN...

Page 33: ... row of the display Pressing FLASH again moves the cursor back to the middle row LINE KEYS Use pre programmed settings to help with the program entry These settings vary between programs from LINE 1 0 off and LINE 2 1 on to preset values for timers where LINE 1 5 LINE 2 10 LINE 3 15 etc For programs with this option the line key which currently matches the programmed setting will light steady The ...

Page 34: ...ames Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü Enter characters π Σ Ω Accepts an entry only requi...

Page 35: ...programming mode various Softkey options are displayed These keys will allow you to easily select scan or move through the programs _ Program Mode Base Service OP1 OP2 _ Program Mode CCIS Hard Mtnance Table 1 4 Softkey Display Prompts Softkey Display Prompts If you press this Softkey The system will back Go back one step in the program display You can press VOLUME or VOLUME to scroll forward or ba...

Page 36: ...8 Day Night Service Patterns 32 Dial Tone Detector DTMF Receiver 64 Toll Restriction Classes 15 Verifiable Account Code Table 2000 Trunk Trunk Port Number 400 Trunk Ports Total Analog Trunks BRI Trunk Ports T1 PRI Trunk Ports E M Analog Trunk Ports DID Analog Trunk Ports VoIP Trunk Ports 400 176 176 400 44 88 400 DID Translation Tables 20 DID Translation Table Entries 4000 DISA Classes of Service ...

Page 37: ...rtual Extension Ports 512 Virtual Extension Number Range 1 89999999 Extension cannot start with 0 or 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP 56 ADA Recording Jack Adapters 240 UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless SIP DECT Access Points Unlimited Door Boxes 8 Door Box Numbers 1 8 DSS Consoles Numbers 60 Button DSS Console 32 Operator Access Number 0 Default Operator Extension 15 Ringdown Assignments 960 SLT Adapters 16 HF R Adapters ...

Page 38: ... Conference Conference Circuits 64 maximum 32 Parties Per Conference 96 when the analog modem function is not used Data Communication Interfaces APR Software Port Numbers 449 512 APA Adapters 240 APR Adapters 240 Department and Pickup Groups Department Extension Group Numbers 1 64 Call Pickup Group Numbers 1 64 Hotline Internal Hotline 960 External Hotline 960 Table 1 5 System Number Plan Capaciti...

Page 39: ...oIP ADA2 Recording Jack Adapters 240 PSA Power Failure Adapters 256 RTP Ports 0 65535 RTCP Ports 0 65535 DSP Resources 256 Note 2 Note 1 The VRS InMail supports up to 16 ports and they are shared by the VM8000 InMail and VRS Note 2 The maximum number of VOIP DSP Resources depend on which license is installed Passwords Programming Passwords Level 1 MF PCPro WebPro User Name 47544 necii Level 2 IN P...

Page 40: ...word Users 8 Footnotes Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long Refer to the Flexible System Numbering feature in the UNIVERGE SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual Table 1 5 System Number Plan Capacities Continued System Number Plan Capacities System Type Number Plan Capacities ...

Page 41: ...System Configuration Setup Program 11 System Numbering Program 12 Night Mode Setup Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup Program 15 Extension Basic Setup Program 16 Department Group Setup Program 20 System Option Setup Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup Program 22 Incoming Call Setup Program 23 Answer Features Setup Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup Program 25 VRS DISA Setup Program...

Page 42: ... Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service CCIS Program 51 NetLink Service Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP Program 90 Maintenance Program Program 92 Copy Program Program 93 System Information Table 2 1 Programming Modes Continued Program Number Program...

Page 43: ...iguration Setup 10 01 Time and Date Level SA Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Year 13 97 No Setting Enter 2 digits for year 13 97 02 Month 01 12 No Setting Enter 2 digits 01 12 for the month 03 Day 01 31 No Setting Enter 2 digits 01 31 for the day 04 Week 1 7 Sun Sat No Setting Enter digit for the day of the week 1 Sunday 7 Saturday 05 Hour 00 23 No Setting Enter 2 digits ...

Page 44: ...Data Default Description 01 Country Code Dial up to four digits 0 9 1 Enter the country code 02 International Access Code Dial up to four digits 0 9 No setting Enter the international access code 03 Other Area Access Code Dial up to two digits 0 9 9 Enter the other area access code 04 Area Code Dial up to six digits 0 9 No setting Enter the local area code 05 Trunk Access Code Dial up to eight dig...

Page 45: ...n plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it or you may have to reseat the blade For CNF PKG Setup For DLCA PKG Setup s Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 03 ETU Setup Level IN NOTE The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Input Data Physical Port Number 01 32 Item No Item Input Data Default 02 Logical Port Number 0 960 0 Input Data Physical Po...

Page 46: ... 02 Logical Port Number B1 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 1 960 2 SLT Adapter 1 960 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset BCH 1 960 6 PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging 1 8 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP for Tone Ringer 1 8 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP for Door Box 1 8 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP for ACI 1 96 10 DSS 1 32 11 Not Used 0 03 Additional Data 0 No Setting 3 BCH 01 16 0 04 Not Used 05 Not Used B Channel 2 Item No Item Input Data Default 06 Terminal ...

Page 47: ...ion Information 0 No option 1 8LK Unit 2 16LK Unit 3 24ADM 0 10 Bottom Option Information Only applies to DTL style telephones 0 No option 1 APR 2 ADA 3 BHA 4 Not Used 5 BCA 0 11 Handset Option Information 0 No option 1 PSA PSD 2 Bluetooth Cordless Handset BCH 0 Input Data Physical Port Number 01 16 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 0 960 0 03 Transmit Gain Level S Level 1 57 ...

Page 48: ...1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 0 400 0 Input Data Physical Port Number 01 200 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 0 400 0 Input Data Physical Port Number 01 04 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number 0 400 0 02 2 4 Wire 0 2 Wire 1 4 Wire 1 03 E M Line Control Method 0 TYPE I 1 TYPE V 0 ...

Page 49: ...t 2 S Point Not used 3 NW Mode Leased Line 4 NW Mode Interconnected Line 5 NW Mode Interconnected Line Fixed Layer1 NT 6 S Point Leased Line Not used 1 02 Logical Port Number The starting port number of a BRI line is displayed Two logic ports are automatically assigned to a BRI line 0 Not Used 1 T Point 1 400 2 S Point 1 960 Not used 3 NW Mode Leased Line 1 256 4 NW Mode Interconnected Line 1 256 ...

Page 50: ...inition 0 Enblock Sending 1 Overlap Sending 1 09 Dial Information Element ISDN Protocol definition Only when Dialing Sending Mode 10 03 08 is set for 1 Overlap Sending 0 Keypad Facility 1 Called Party Number 0 10 Master Slave System If set to 0 system is synchronized to the network clock If set to 1 system is not synchronized to the network clock For NW Mode 0 Slave System 1 Master System 0 11 Net...

Page 51: ...t to 1 Layer 1 deactivation is considered to be a fault so the channel will be skipped and alarm 10 issued 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Input Data ISDN Line Number 01 24 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 ISDN Line Mode 0 Not Used 1 T Point 2 S Point Not used 3 NW Mode Leased Line 4 NW Mode Interconnected Line 5 NW Mode Interconnected Line Fixed Layer1 NT 6 S Point Leased Line Not used 1 02 Logical Port N...

Page 52: ...definition 0 Enbloc Sending 1 Overlap Sending 0 09 Dial Information Element ISDN Protocol definition Only when Dialing Sending Mode 10 03 08 is set for 1 Overlap Sending 0 Keypad Facility 1 Called Party Number 0 10 Master Slave System If set to 0 system is synchronized to the network clock If set to 1 system is not synchronized to the network clock For NW Mode 0 Slave System 1 Master System 0 11 N...

Page 53: ...ic number 4 Subscriber number 5 Abbreviated number 2 19 Numbering Plan Identification ISDN Protocol definition Select the Numbering Plan used for the ISDN circuit 0 Unknown 1 ISDN numbering plan 2 Data numbering plan 3 Telex numbering plan 4 National standard numbering plan 5 Private numbering plan 1 20 Network Exchange Selection Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN circuit 0 Standard same as NI ...

Page 54: ...ed to a DTI T1 line 0 400 0 02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 D4 12 Multi Frame 1 ESF 24 Multi Frame 1 03 Zero Code Suppression 0 B8ZS 1 AMI ZCS 0 04 Line Length Selection 0 0 feet 133 feet 1 133 feet 266 feet 2 266 feet 399 feet 3 399 feet 533 feet 4 533 feet 655 feet 0 05 T1 Clock Source 0 Internal 1 External 1 06 Number of Ports 0 Auto 1 4 Ports 2 8 Ports 3 12 Ports 4 16 Ports 5 20 Ports 0 07 Str...

Page 55: ...480 0 Input Data Physical Port Number 01 24 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Logical Port Number The start port number of a T1 line is displayed and 24 logic ports are automatically assigned to a DTI T1 line 0 400 0 02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 D4 12 Multi Frame 1 ESF 24 Multi Frame 1 03 Zero Code Suppression 0 B8ZS 1 AMI ZCS 0 04 Line Length Selection 0 0 feet 133 feet 1 133 feet 266 feet 2 ...

Page 56: ... system automatically define it or redefine the type manually The system must have a blade installed to view change the options for that type of blade Feature Cross Reference Universal Slots 06 Number of Ports 0 Auto 1 4 Ports 2 8 Ports 3 12 Ports 4 16 Ports 5 20 Ports 0 07 Straight Cross Wiring 0 Auto 1 Manual Cross 2 Manual Straight 0 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 57: ... 1 External MOH 2 Service Tone 3 VMDB 2 The Music on Hold MOH source can be internal synthesized or from a customer provided music source The customer provided source can connect to a PGD 2 U10 ADP or the connector on the side of the Base Cabinet MOH IN connection Trunk MOH and Extension MOH music source use the same Music on Hold source 02 Music on Hold Tone Selection If Item 1 is 0 1 Download Fi...

Page 58: ...one Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface ACI Background Music Music on Hold 05 Sub Music on Hold Tone Selection If Item 4 is 1 0 No Tone 1 Download File1 2 Download File2 3 Download File3 If Item 4 is 3 0 No Tone 1 100 VRS Message Number Input Data ...

Page 59: ...alog Communications Interface ACI Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 05 General Purpose Relay Setup Level IN Input Data General Purpose Relay No 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Slot No Physical Port of DLCA Sensor Circuit No Slot No 0 24 DLCA Port 0 16 Relay No 0 5 8 After each entry press the Transfer Key to advance to the next entry 0 0 0 02 Drive Timer Setup 0 64800 0 No Setting 1 ...

Page 60: ...mpatibility Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 06 ISDN BRI Setup Level IN Input Data SLOT Number 1 24 ISDN BRI Circuit 1 4 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 TEI Selection Select the method the system uses when assigning Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI values to BRI ports 0 Select by SPID number 1 Select by Channel ID number 0 02 DID Mode 0 Route by Called Party Number 1 Route by Redirectin...

Page 61: ...ging with the normal ring cadence cycle Without pre ringing the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs This may cause a ring delay depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle Conditions Used with Analog Trunks only Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Synchronous Ringing Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 08 Pre Ringing...

Page 62: ...m Configuration Setup 10 09 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Level IN Input Data Circuit Resource Number 01 144 Item No Input Data Default Setting 01 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only The GCD CP10 has 80 channel DSP resources receivers only for basic chassis When a GPZ BS10 is installed there are 64 DSP resources receivers available In case 0 Common is selected and if 14 02 10 Caller ID r...

Page 63: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 23 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Caller ID Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward System Access DISA Tie Lines ...

Page 64: ...55 248 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 254 192 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 255 224 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 0 The setting o...

Page 65: ... 4 10Mbps Half Duplex 5 1Gbps Full Duplex 0 NIC Auto Negotiate GCD CP10 07 NAPT Router IP Address Default Gateway WAN 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 Set the IP address on the WAN side of router 08 ICMP Redirect 0 Enable 1 Disable 0 0 signaling packets WILL follow ICMP redirect messages 1 signaling packets WILL NOT follow ICMP redirect messages f...

Page 66: ... 255 255 255 0 0 11 NIC Setup 0 Auto Detect 1 100Mbps Full Duplex 3 10Mbps Full Duplex 5 1 Gbps Full Duplex 0 Set for GPZ IPLE 13 DNS Primary Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 Set for adding a function for DNS 14 DNS Secondary Address 15 DNS Port 0 65535 53 17 IPL NIC Port Setting 0 MDI 1 MDI X 0 18 GCD CP10 Network Setup CCPU MTU 1000 1500...

Page 67: ...3 Setting 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Set whether to use the SSLv3 in SMTP 0 Disable is encrypted with TLSv1 This data requires a reset to apply changed data to the system 21 Default Gateway MAC Address Read Only 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default Description ...

Page 68: ...No Item Input Data Default Description 01 DHCP Server Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Enable Disable the built in DHCP Server 02 Lease Time Days 0 255 0 day Lease Time of the IP address to a client Press the Transfer Key to increment to the next setting data Hour 0 23 0 hour Minutes 1 59 30 minutes 05 Last DHCP Data 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 If 10 13 01 is enabled this setting determines if DHCP resource is ...

Page 69: ... Data Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 The Range of the IP address to Lease When Maximum has not been entered the maximum value equals the minimum value When Single is selected in 10 13 04 only 1 scope range can be entered When Divide Same Network is selected in 10 13 04 a maximum of 10 scope ranges can be entered Minimum 1 0 0 1 126 255 255 254 128 1 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 1 ...

Page 70: ... Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 15 Client Information Setup Level SA Input Data Client Number 1 960 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 The IP address should be assigned out of the scope range set up in Program 10 14 MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 ...

Page 71: ...ver Set IP address of DNS Server Code number 0 255 6 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 03 TFTP Server Set the name for the TFTP Server Code number 0 255 66 Fixed Maximum 64 character strings No setting 04 DRS Code number 0 255 161 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 172 16 0 ...

Page 72: ... Address used for AutoConfig Code number 0 255 43 Fixed Sub code number 141 IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 11 Config File Name Set a File Name used for AutoConfig Code number 0 255 43 Fixed Sub code number 151 Maximum 15 character strings No setting 12 Vender Class ID Code number 0 255 60 Fixed Maximum 256 character strings NECDT700 1...

Page 73: ...erver 1 Code number 0 255 162 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 21 LDS Server 2 Code number 0 255 162 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 22 LDS Server 3 Code number 0 255 162 Fixed IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254...

Page 74: ... SIP Server Receive Port Code number 0 255 168 Fixed Port 1 65535 5080 28 Config File Name Code number 0 255 43 Fixed Sub Code number 0 255 152 Up to 15 characters No setting 29 Config File Name Code number 0 255 43 Fixed Sub Code number 0 255 153 Up to 15 characters No setting Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 75: ...eper Setup Level SA Input Data Item Name Input Data Default 01 Gatekeeper Mode Set IP Address either automatically or manually if using an external Gatekeeper 0 No Gatekeeper 1 Automatic 2 Manual 0 02 Gatekeeper IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 04 Preferred Gatekeeper When 10 17 01 is set to 1 use this to set the preferred ID of multipl...

Page 76: ...tions None Feature Cross Reference IP Trunk H 323 Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 18 H 323 Alias Address Setup Level SA Input Data Number of Alias 1 6 Item Name Input Data Default 01 Alias Address Set the telephone number Alias Address to external gatekeeper Dial up to 12 digits 0 9 No setting 02 Alias Address Type Set the Alias Address Type to external gatekeeper 0 E164 0 ...

Page 77: ...ogram 10 System Configuration Setup 10 19 VoIP DSP Resource Selection Level SA Input Data Slot Number 1 DSP Resource Number 01 256 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection 0 Common use for both IP extensions and trunks 1 IP Extension 2 SIP Trunk 3 CCIS Networking 4 Use for NetLink 5 Blocked 6 Common without Unicast Paging 7 Multicast Paging 8 Unicast Paging Resource 1 1 Resou...

Page 78: ...st Party CTI 10 Contact Center Agent Control 11 O M Server 12 Traffic Report Output 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 14 IP DECT Directory Access 15 Presense Item No Item Input Data Default 01 TCP Port 0 65535 External Device 1 CTI Server 0 External Device 2 Contact Center 4000 External Device 4 Networking System 30000 External Device 5 SMDR Output 0 External Device 6 DIM Output 0 External Dev...

Page 79: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 39 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 80: ...ExternalSource I O Selection on GCD CP10 Determines the external music source input output selection for GCD CP10 CN8 and CN9 0 External MOH AUX2 External Speaker AUX1 1 BGM source AUX2 External Speaker AUX1 2 External MOH AUX2 BGM source AUX1 Relationships between CN number and Relay number are as follows AUX2 Relay2 AUX1 Relay1 1 05 General Purpose Relay Switch Selection on GCD CP10 0 Off 1 Rela...

Page 81: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 41 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 82: ...IP System Interconnection Setup Level IN Input Data System Number 001 1000 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 System Interconnection 0 No Disable 1 Yes Enable 0 02 IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 03 Call Control Port 1 65535 1720 04 Dial Number Up to 12 digits 0 9 None 05 Keep Alive Mode for SIP 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 06 SIP Profile 1 Pr...

Page 83: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 43 Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 84: ...e system should adjust for daylight savings time 00 00 23 59 02 00 03 Start Month Summer Time Enter the month when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time 01 12 1 12 Jan 1 2 Feb etc 3 04 Start of Week Enter the week of the month when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time The week will start on the day listed in 10 24 05 0 Last Week of Month 0 5 2 05 Start ...

Page 85: ...s None Feature Cross Reference Clock Calendar Display 08 End of Week Day Enter the day of the week when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time 01 Sunday 02 Monday etc 1 7 Sun 1 Mon 2 etc 1 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 86: ...t the gateway prefix registered to the outside gatekeeper Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 25 H 323 Gateway Prefix Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Gateway Prefix Entry 0 Off 1 On 0 02 Gateway Prefix Value Up to 12 digits 0 9 No setting ...

Page 87: ...ed with the System ID in the Numbering Plan Program 11 01 03 When the digits are analyzed and the system ID is determined from the SV9100 data set in the Numbering Plan the networking call is sent to the IP Address set in this program The IP Address should be the IP Address of the peer CPU Program 10 12 01 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 02 Call ...

Page 88: ...Domain Name Set the domain name of the SIP URL Up to 64 Characters ex UserID HostName DomainName None 02 Host Name Set the host name of the SIP URL Up to 48 Characters ex UserID HostName DomainName None 03 Transport Protocol Set the protocol for the connection 0 UDP 1 TCP 2 TLS 0 05 Domain Assignment If the information from Telco was a domain name siptrunk sip com then set to domain If the informa...

Page 89: ... but it comes in on the first available trunk When enabled the inbound call comes in and follows your normal DID routing but maps to that specified trunk If that trunk is busy it sends back a busy unless you build a hunt group To build the hunt group it references command 14 12 02 pilot register ID This points you to command 10 36 02 All numbers with the same pilot are in the same hunt group 0 Dis...

Page 90: ...erver and the SIP Server is then removed or not used the entries in Program 10 29 xx must be set back to their default settings Even if 10 29 01 is set to 0 off the SV9100 still checks the settings in the remaining 10 29 programs Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Profile 1 6 01 Default Proxy Outbound Set whether or not the SIP message is always sent through the Default Proxy 0 Off 1 On 0 ...

Page 91: ...e registered in the registration server 0 None 1 Manual 0 06 Registrar IP Address Set the IP address of the SIP registration server 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 07 Registrar Port 0 65535 5060 11 Registrar Domain Name Set the domain name of the registration server Up to 128 Characters None 12 Domain Name Specify the domain name of the SIP serve...

Page 92: ...ds 404 Not Found Message If PRG10 29 05 Register Mode is 0 Off it is necessary to set 0 off in PRG10 29 16 0 Off Allow invalid Invite message 1 On Deny invalid Invite message 0 19 Keep Alive by Option Message 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 20 Authentication Trial 0 9 1 21 NAT Router 0 Not used 1 Used 0 22 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 23 ...

Page 93: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 53 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 94: ... progress will be released Park Hold orbits will be released No further Park Hold information will be sent until the link is active The link will automatically become active when the next keep alive response is received Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 31 Network Keep Alive Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Keep Alive Interval This program is used to set the inte...

Page 95: ...ed for the retry count for the link to be taken out of service and the calls in progress and Park Hold orbits to be released For example if an ISDN NetLink connection is disconnected at Layer 1 then the Keep Alive message cannot be sent therefore the Keep Alive operation will not occur Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 96: ...nnels 1 to 10 will be available If a call is attempted on channels 11 to 30 the caller will receive busy tone This also applies on the other side of the network as well The setting is for each slot within the SV9100 Ensure that you select the correct slot before making any changes This program will not affect a PRI card set as Trunk or Station mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Prog...

Page 97: ...he CPU This allows the CPU to keep a current location of the entire end UAs 60 65535 3600 02 Authentication Mode Check here if a password is desired for the IP SIP phones to register When checked 15 05 16 must have a password entered and the SIP phone must have the same password When using Authentication the station number is the authorization name 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 03 SIP Registrar Proxy Domai...

Page 98: ... SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup Level IN Input Data Register ID 0 31 Item No Item Input Data Default Profile 1 6 01 Registration Determine if the SIP trunk information is registered 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 User ID Set the SIP trunk User ID Up to 32 Characters None 03 Authentication User ID Set the SIP trunk Authentication User ID Up to 64 Characters None 04 Authentication Password Set th...

Page 99: ...versal Plug and Play options for SIP trunks Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 37 UPnP Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 UPnP Mode Router must support UPnP 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 Retry Time 0 60 3600 1 59 cannot be input 60 ...

Page 100: ...ce input Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface ACI Background Music Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 38 BGM Resource Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 BGM Resource Type 0 CPU IN MOH IN 1 ACI Port 0 02 ACI Port Number for BGM Source only used if 10 38 01 is set to 1 0 96 0 ...

Page 101: ... Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use fractional T1 or PRI Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 39 Fractional Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Fractional 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 ...

Page 102: ...stem Configuration Setup 10 41 General Purpose Contact Detector Level IN Input Data System Number 1 50 Slot Number 1 24 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 System Number Slot Number The User can set the System ID when NetLink is active ESIU Slot No used by PGD 2 U10 ADP System No Slot No 0 Not Used 0 No Setting 1 50 1 24 0 02 ESIU Port Number ESIU Port No used by PGD 2 U10 ADP 0 No Setting 1 16 0 0...

Page 103: ...ion Message Detail Recording SMDR Hotel Motel Transfer Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 42 Virtual Loop Back Port Setting Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Number of Loop Back Ports 0 30 0 No setting 0 02 Logical Trunk Port Number 0 400 0 03 Logical Station Port Number 0 896 0 04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1 5 1 05 Calling Party Number 0 No 1 Yes 1 06 Not Used 07 Not Used ...

Page 104: ...ion in the system Password is not required Auto If set to Auto the SIP user name and password must be entered on the actual IP phone These settings must match 84 22 15 05 27 or the phone does not come on line Manual When the phone boots up it prompts user to enter a user ID and password before logging in If the user name and password are programmed in the SIP User settings in the telephone it come...

Page 105: ...m is not used and Program 51 17 01 will be used per each System ID 0 65535 5080 07 Encryption Mode 0 Off 1 On 0 08 Encryption Type 0 Mode1 0 09 One Time Password Up to 10 characters 0 9 None 10 46 07 10 Start Port 1 960 1 10 46 01 11 Multicast IP Address Set the Multicast IP address so that two or more main devices don t overlap on the same network or if Multicast is used by other IP services 224 ...

Page 106: ...1 2 The second page the system makes will use port 30004 3000 2 2 The Management ID will increment every time the page is used After the Management ID reaches 64 it will start over so the next page will use Management ID 1 The max port starting from 3000 would be 30128 3000 64 2 0 65535 30000 13 Subscribe Session Port When using NetLink Program 51 01 01 this Program is not used and Program 51 17 0...

Page 107: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 67 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 108: ...to setup the information of Terminal License Server Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 47 Terminal License Server Information Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Register Port of TCP I F 0 65535 6080 02 TCP Keep Alive Time 1 255 seconds 5 ...

Page 109: ...Activation Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Software Key Code 20 digit character None 02 Activation Code 8 digit hexadecimal number None 03 Feature Code 7 digit number None Key Operation for Item 03 Transfer key Edit next feature code Up to 10 feature codes are possible to input at once Register the license when 10th feature code is edited Soft Key2 BACK Edit previous feature...

Page 110: ...le the command to save the license file via USB memory which is issued from the license server Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 49 License File Activation Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data 01 Save License File on USB Drive Dial 1 TRF Press TRF to cancel ...

Page 111: ...9 Table 2 2 License Information Feature Code Item Name Feature Name WebPro PCPro Min Max Note 0002 SV9100 NETLINK NODE LIC 01 NetLink 1 49 This license number is determined according to number of secondary sites For example if you have one 1 Primary and three 3 Secondary sites networked three 3 licenses are needed All licenses are activated at the Primary site With each SV9100 NETLINK NODE LIC 01 ...

Page 112: ...16 1012 SV9100 INMAIL VM BOX LIC 01 VM Box 1 896 1014 SV9100 INMAIL EMAIL CLIENT LIC 01 InMail Email Client 1 896 1402 SV91 93 UM8000 FAX PORT LIC 01 UMS FAX Port 1 4 1 Port FAX 1403 SV91 93 UM8000 TTS PORT LIC 01 UMS TTS Port 1 6 1 Port of Text to Speech language for Microsoft outlook activation license 1404 SV91 93 UM8000 UMS CLIENT LIC 01 UMS Client 1 896 This license provides the following for...

Page 113: ...002 SV91 93 95 CA UPG LIC 20 256 CA Up 20 to 256 On Off 3003 SV91 93 95 CA NETWORK CLIENT PACK LIC 05 CA Network Client 1 999 3004 SV91 93 95 CA ADD REMOTE SITE LIC 01 CA Add Remote Site 1 999 3005 SV91 93 95 CA ADD REMOTE SOFTWARE LIC 01 CA Remote Site Soft 1 999 3006 SV91 93 95 CA SYS TRAFFIC ANALYSIS LIC CA Traffic Analys On Off 3007 SV91 93 95 CA SYS PMS INTEGRATION LIC CA PMS Integration On O...

Page 114: ...ify Addon LIC ESN Call Notify 1 9999 3400 SV9100 CTI OCX LIC CTI OCX On Off 3513 SV9100 LUA PMS LIC LUA PMS On Off 3514 SV9100 LUA PHONEPRO LIC LUA PhonePro On Off 5001 SV9100 IP TRUNK LIC 01 IP Trunk 1 400 5012 SV9100 NETWORKING LIC 01 K CCIS over IP 1 400 Each system need this license to specify suitable K CCIS over IP channel Trunk number 5050 DT820 GIGABIT DT820 Gigabit 1 896 For DT820 softwar...

Page 115: ...BILE PRESENCE LIC UCS Mobile Presence On Off 5312 SV9100 UCS VOICEMAIL INT LIC 01 UCS InMail Integration 1 128 Access to InMail function from UC Suite Client base license 5313 SV9100 UCS WEB CLIENT LIC 01 UCS Web Client 1 512 5320 SV9100 UCS VERSION LIC R1 UCS Version 1 On Off 5327 SV9100 INCONTROL ADDON 01 LIC InControl Addon On Off 6200 PVA CCIS PORT LIC PVA CCIS Port 4 400 6201 SV9100 PVA PMS U...

Page 116: ...whether the CD PRTA works as PRI or T1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 51 PRI T1 Selection of CD PRTA Level IN Input Data System ID 0 50 Slot Number 01 24 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 PRI T1 Selection Choose whether the CD PRTA works as PRI or T1 0 PRI 1 T1 0 PRI ...

Page 117: ... License Information to display information on free of charge Demo license Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 52 Free Demo License Information Level IN Input Data Item No Item Read Data 01 Remaining days of Free Demo License 0 9999 ...

Page 118: ...is 256 1 Index 1 has 128 of feature code 5103 and index 2 also has 128 of feature code 5103 for a total of 256 2 Index 1 has 255 of feature code 5103 and index 2 has 1 of feature code 5103 for a total of 256 When using IP devices IP Resource licenses 5103 must be assigned to the CPU Slot 1 for them to be available for use If this is not done IP related features will not work Feature Cross Referenc...

Page 119: ...00 02 LAN Setup LAN setup for each unit 0 Auto Detect 1 100Mbps Full Duplex 2 100Mbps Half Duplex 3 10Mbps Full Duplex 4 10Mbps Half Duplex 0 03 Main Add on 0 Main 1 Add on 1 04 Sub Net Mask 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 2...

Page 120: ...Program 10 System Configuration Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 05 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 121: ...d in the XML application name and URL Link information XML URL Link Information can be set for up to five system bases Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 56 XML Portal IP Phone Level IN Input Data XML URL Information Link 1 5 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Name Up to 40 characters No Setting 02 URL Up to 256 characters No Setting ...

Page 122: ... Data Default Related Program 01 Network Address Sets local network address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 46 14 02 Subnet Mask Sets local subnet mask 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 2...

Page 123: ...onditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 62 NetBIOS Setting Level IN Input Data Area Table 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 NetBIOS Setting NetBIOS Mode Enable Disable NetBIOS Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 02 NetBIOS Setting NetBIOS Name Assign the NetBIOS name up to 15 characters Up to 15 characters SV9100 ...

Page 124: ...nize the time for IP Video Door phone or NTP clients connected to the SV9100 network Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 65 NTP Server Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 NTP Server Select whether or not the NTP Server is used 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 NTP Server Port Sets the NTP Server Port 1 65535 123 ...

Page 125: ...guration Setup 10 67 SIP Stack Configuration Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 DNS Mode Select whether DNS mode is enabled 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 DNS IP Address Set the IP Address of DNS Server xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 0 0 0 03 DNS Port Assign the DNS Port 0 65535 53 04 DNS Source Port Assign the DNS Source Port 0 65535 53 05 Request ReTx Start Time Assign the ...

Page 126: ...Issue 4 0 2 86 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ...

Page 127: ... available for IP Trunking Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 68 IP Trunk Availability Level IN Index 1 System ID 0 50 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Trunk Type 0 None 1 SIP 2 H 323 3 CCIS 0 02 Start Port 0 400 0 03 Number of Port 0 400 0 ...

Page 128: ... 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 03 UC Server Host Name Any Characters No setting 04 UC Server Port Number 0 65535 0 05 UC Server Trace 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 06 UC Server Use Name for Communication 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 07 UC Server Large System Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 08 UC Server Auto Restart 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 UC Server Auto Restart Frequency 0 Weekly 1 Monthly 0 10...

Page 129: ...9 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 12 UC Server Auto Restart Day 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 0 13 UC Server Auto Restart Time 00 00 23 59 00 00 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 130: ... to set Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 70 UC Server VoiceMail Interface Settings Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 UC Server VoiceMail Integration 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 UM8000 IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 03 UM8000 Port Number 0 65535 0 ...

Page 131: ...l connect to Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 71 UC Server Contact Center Settings Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 MIS Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 02 MIS Server Computer Name Any Characters No setting 03 MIS Server Port Number 0 65535 0 ...

Page 132: ... the Private Key for TLS connection when the SV9100 receives a TLS request Conditions None Feature Cross Reference TLS on SIP Program 10 System Configuration Setup 10 72 Network Security Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Server Certificate Up to 32 characters No setting 02 Private Key Up to 32 characters No setting ...

Page 133: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 93 ...

Page 134: ...Issue 4 0 2 94 Program 10 System Configuration Setup ...

Page 135: ...ning with 6 For example if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected are 600 699 If you enter 4 in step 2 below the entries affected are 6000 6999 Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials For example entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60 In the default program only and use 2 digit codes All the other codes are sing...

Page 136: ...tup for Contact Center 11 14 Service Code Setup for Hotel 11 15 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access 11 16 Single Digit Service Code Setup 2 Extension Number 11 02 Extension Numbering 11 04 Virtual Extension Numbering 11 06 ACI Extension Numbering 11 07 Department Group Pilot Numbers 11 08 ACI Group Pilot Number 11 17 Group Pilot Number 3 Trunk Access Code 11 09 01 Trunk Access Cod...

Page 137: ...cess 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 None Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Network System ID if type 8 0 50 Default New Default New 1X 3 2 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14s 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 2X 3 2 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 27 0 0 28 0 0 29 0 0 20 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0 3X 4 2 ...

Page 138: ...0 48 0 0 49 0 0 40 0 0 4 0 0 4 0 0 5X 3 1 51 0 0 52 0 0 53 0 0 Table 2 3 System Numbering Default Settings Continued Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 None Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Network System ID if type 8 0 50 Default New Default New ...

Page 139: ... 6 0 0 6 0 0 7X 3 1 71 0 0 72 0 0 73 0 0 74 0 0 75 0 0 76 0 0 Table 2 3 System Numbering Default Settings Continued Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 None Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Network System ID if type 8 0 50 Default New Default New ...

Page 140: ...91 0 0 92 0 0 93 0 0 94 0 0 95 0 0 96 0 0 97 0 0 98 0 0 99 0 0 Table 2 3 System Numbering Default Settings Continued Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 None Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Network System ID if type 8 0 50 Default New Default New ...

Page 141: ...0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 2 3 System Numbering Default Settings Continued Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 None Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Network System ID if type 8 0 50 Default New Default New ...

Page 142: ...1 7 2 1 8 2 1 9 2 1 0 2 1 4 1 2 1 Table 2 3 System Numbering Default Settings Continued Dial Types 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 3 Trunk Access 4 Special Trunk Access 5 Operator Access 6 Flexible Routing 8 Networking 9 Dial Extension Analyze 0 None Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Network System ID if type 8 0 50 Default New Default New ...

Page 143: ...d retain the same extension number Default Conditions None Program 11 System Numbering 11 02 Extension Numbering Level IN Input Data Extension Port Number 001 960 Item No Extension Number Description 01 Dial Up to 8 digits Set up extension numbers for multiline telephones single line telephones including SLTII Adapter APR and IP telephones Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated in Progr...

Page 144: ...Issue 4 0 2 104 Program 11 System Numbering Feature Cross Reference Department Calling Flexible System Numbering Intercom ...

Page 145: ...ogram 11 01 or Program 11 20 Default Conditions None Program 11 System Numbering 11 04 Virtual Extension Numbering Level IN Input Data Virtual Extension Numbers 001 512 Item No Virtual Extension Number Description 01 Dial up to 8 digits Set up Virtual Extension numbers The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11 02 11 06 11 07 11 08 and 11 17 Virtual Port Number Extension Number 1 201...

Page 146: ...Issue 4 0 2 106 Program 11 System Numbering Feature Cross Reference Flexible System Numbering Multiple Directory Numbers Call Coverage ...

Page 147: ...or Program 11 20 Default ACI Port Numbers have no extension number set Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface ACI Flexible System Numbering Program 11 System Numbering 11 06 ACI Extension Numbering Level IN Input Data ACI Port Number 01 96 Item No ACI Extension Number Description Related Program 01 Dial Up to 8 digits The extension number cannot be duplicated in Pr...

Page 148: ...Program 11 20 as type 2 Default No Setting Conditions None Program 11 System Numbering 11 07 Department Group Pilot Numbers Level IN Input Data Department Extension Group Number 01 64 Item No Extension Group Pilot Number Description Related Program 01 Dial Up to 8 digits Assign department group pilot numbers The number set up by Program 11 02 Extension Numbering cannot be used The extension number...

Page 149: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 109 Feature Cross Reference Department Calling Department Step Calling ...

Page 150: ...e number should be assigned in Program 11 01 or Program 11 20 as type 2 Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface ACI Program 11 System Numbering 11 08 ACI Group Pilot Number Level IN Input Data ACI Group Number 01 16 Item No ACI Group Pilot Number Description Related Program 01 Dial Up to 8 digits The extension number cannot be duplicated in Progra...

Page 151: ...ess code in Program 11 09 you must make the corresponding changes in Program 11 01 Input Data Item No Trunk Access Code Description Default Related Program 01 Dial Up to four digits Assign the trunk access code normally 9 This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection 9 11 01 System Numbering 14 01 Basic Trunk Data Setup 14 05 Trunk Group 14 06 Trunk Group Routing 21 02 ...

Page 152: ...Issue 4 0 2 112 Program 11 System Numbering Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection Central Office Calls Placing Trunk Group Routing ...

Page 153: ...nnect Program 11 System Numbering 11 10 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Level IN Input Data Item No Item Terminals Default Related Program 01 Night Mode Switching MLT SLT 718 12 xx 20 07 01 02 Not Used 03 Setting the System Time MLT 728 04 Storing Common Speed Dialing Numbers MLT 753 05 Storing Group Speed Dialing Numbers MLT 754 06 Setting the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line ML...

Page 154: ...rd or Erase General Message MLT SLT 612 20 07 15 23 SMDR Extension Accumulated Printout Code MLT 621 20 07 18 24 SMDR Group Accumulated Printout Code MLT 622 20 07 19 25 Account Code Accumulated Printout Code MLT 623 20 07 20 26 Forced Trunk Disconnect MLT SLT Not Set 20 07 11 27 Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing Calls MLT SLT 645 20 07 12 28 Not Used 29 Not Used 30 Register DECTPP MLT Not Set 31 De...

Page 155: ...30 42 Maintenance Service MLT Not Set 43 Not Used 44 Not Used 45 Not Used 46 Watch Message Setting MLT SLT 614 47 Warning Message Setting MLT 615 48 Auto Dial Setting for Sensor MLT 617 49 Auto Dial Setting for Remote Watch MLT 619 51 Power Saving for Power Save Group MLT SLT 731 53 Clear Alarm Report MLT SLT Not Set 54 Save Store Statistical Information of RTP MLT 671 20 07 35 MLT Multiline Termi...

Page 156: ...ng 725 Item 18 allows users to turn on or turn off Background Music Program 11 System Numbering 11 11 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Level IN Input Data Item No Item Terminal s Default Related Program 01 Call Forward All MLT SLT 741 02 Call Forward Busy MLT SLT 742 03 Call Forward No Answer MLT SLT 743 04 Call Forward Busy No Answer MLT SLT 744 05 Call Forward Both Ring MLT SLT 745 0...

Page 157: ...4 Change Station Class of Service Allow an extension user to change the COS of another extension Must be allowed in Program 20 13 28 MLT 677 20 13 28 25 Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group MLT SLT 602 20 11 17 24 05 26 Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group MLT SLT 603 27 Destination of Automatic Transfer Each Extension Group MLT 604 20 11 17 24 05 28 Delayed Transf...

Page 158: ...plit MLT SLT No Setting 47 Set Cancel Call Forward No Answer Split MLT SLT No Setting 48 Set Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer Split MLT SLT No Setting 49 Set Cancel Call Forward Both Ring Split MLT SLT No Setting 50 Set Message Waiting Indication SLT No Setting 15 03 03 45 01 01 51 Cancel Message Waiting Indication SLT No Setting 15 03 03 45 01 01 52 Set Cancel Call Forward All Destination No Sp...

Page 159: ...e Adjustment MLT 662 11 11 37 15 02 12 15 02 41 15 02 42 63 Double Height Character Indication MLT No Setting 15 02 45 64 Reverse Display Indication MLT No Setting 15 02 44 65 Headset Mode Switching MLT No Setting 68 IntraMail Language Selection for own Extension MLT SLT No Setting 47 02 16 69 IntraMail Language Selection for Specific Extension MLT SLT No Setting 20 13 53 47 02 16 75 Multi Device ...

Page 160: ...at may be affected with the changing the code Program 11 System Numbering 11 12 Service Code Setup for Service Access Level IN Input Data Item No Item Terminals Defaul t Related Program 01 Bypass Call Activate Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override This code is available only if you disable the voice mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11 16 09 MLT SLT 707 11 16 09 02 Conference MLT SLT 1 0...

Page 161: ...g MLT SLT 765 23 Meet Me Answer in Same Paging Group MLT SLT 763 31 02 01 24 Combined Paging MLT SLT 1 31 02 01 31 07 25 Direct Call Pickup Own Group MLT SLT 756 26 Call Pickup for Specified Group MLT SLT 768 23 02 27 Call Pickup MLT SLT 23 02 28 Call Pickup for Another Group MLT SLT 769 23 02 29 Direct Extension Call Pickup MLT SLT 30 Specified Trunk Answer MLT SLT 672 31 Park Hold MLT SLT 6 24 0...

Page 162: ...MS MLT SLT 8 52 Live Monitoring SV8100 InMail MLT No Setting 53 Live Recording at SLT MLT SLT 654 54 VRS Routing for ANI DNIS Use when setting up ANI DNIS Routing to the VRS Automated Attendant Using the Transfer feature this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS MLT SLT 782 55 Not Used 56 E911 Alarm Shut Off Enter the Service Code that an extension user can dial to shut off the E911 Ala...

Page 163: ...e Refer to the Input Data chart on the previous pages 62 Security Sensor Rest MLT SLT 716 63 Watch Mode Start MLT SLT 717 64 Security Sensor Mode Start MLT SLT 719 MLT Multiline Terminal SLT Single Line Telephone Input Data Continued Item No Item Terminals Defaul t Related Program ...

Page 164: ...1 System Numbering 11 13 Service Code Setup for Contact Center Level IN Input Data Item No Item Terminals Default 01 Log In Log Out for KTS MLT SLT 5 02 Log Out for SLT SLT 655 03 Set Wrap Up Time for SLT SLT 656 04 Cancel Wrap Up Time for SLT SLT 657 05 Set Off Duty for SLT SLT 658 06 Cancel Off Duty for SLT SLT 659 07 Not Used 08 Agent ID Code Login Allow an AIC Agent to log into a group MLT No ...

Page 165: ...9 to change an agent group the supervisor must enter a 2 digit number for the group For example to change to group 4 the entry would be 669 04 MLT 669 13 Agent Changing Own Group Using this service code an Agent can reassign themselves to another Group MLT 670 MLT Multiline Terminal SLT Single Line Telephone Input Data Continued Item No Item Terminals Default ...

Page 166: ...Program 11 System Numbering 11 14 Service Code Setup for Hotel Level IN Input Data Item No Item Terminals Default 01 Set DND for Own Extension MLT SLT 627 02 Cancel DND for Own Extension MLT SLT 628 03 Set DND for Other Extension MLT SLT 629 04 Cancel DND for Other Extension MLT SLT 630 05 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension MLT SLT 631 06 Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension MLT SLT 632 07 Set Wa...

Page 167: ...Status Change for Own Extension MLT SLT 640 15 Room Status Change for Other Extension MLT SLT 641 16 Room Status Output MLT 642 17 Hotel Room Monitor MLT SLT 675 18 Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction MLT 666 MLT Multiline Terminal SLT Single Line Telephone Input Data Continued Item No Item Terminals Default ...

Page 168: ...use the Service Code The default entry Programs that may be affected when changing the code Program 11 System Numbering 11 15 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Level IN Input Data Item No Item Terminal s Default Related Program 01 Remote Maintenance 730 02 Access in Dial In Conversion Table 760 22 04 22 11 03 Backup Data Save Save the user s soft key settings extension programme...

Page 169: ...10 Not Used 11 Ethernet Port Reset 12 Extension Data Swap MLT 92 04 13 Remote Access from DISA SLT No Setting 22 02 14 Modem Access 740 16 Outbound IP Connection No Setting 90 69 MLT Multiline Terminal SLT Single Line Telephone Input Data Continued Item No Item Terminal s Default Related Program ...

Page 170: ...er a voice or signal call depending on how it is currently defined Programs that may be affected by changing these codes Program 11 System Numbering 11 16 Single Digit Service Code Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Default Related Program 01 Step Call 2 11 12 07 02 Barge In No Setting 11 12 08 03 Switching of Voice Signal Call 1 11 12 06 04 Intercom Off Hook Signaling 11 12 03 05 Camp On 11 1...

Page 171: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 131 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Refer to the Input Data chart on previous pages ...

Page 172: ...efault has a port number assigned for example in the 101 199 3101 3257 first remove the default assignment For example to use extension number 125 as an Master Number first give extension port 025 a different extension assignment Default No Group Pilot Number assigned to any Group 1 64 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Multiple Directory Numbers Call Coverage Keys Program 11 S...

Page 173: ...er which by default has a port number assigned for example in the 101 199 3101 3257 first remove the default assignment For example to use extension number 125 as a Remote Conference pilot number first give extension port 025 a different extension assignment Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 11 System Numbering 11 19 Remote Conference Group Pilot Number Level IN Input Data Item ...

Page 174: ...he system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial type the lower table has priority For example if Table 1 has 211 defined and Table 2 has 2113 defined Table 1 is used to determine the dial type Feature Cross Reference None Program 11 System Numbering 11 20 Dial Extension Analyze Table Level IN Input Data Dial Extension Analyze Table 01 128 Item No Dial Extension Analyze Table ...

Page 175: ...de Setup 12 01 Night Mode Function Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Defaul t Description Related Program 01 Manual Night Mode Switching 0 Off 1 On 1 Allow Prevent activating Night Service by dialing a service code 11 10 01 02 Automatic Night Mode Switching 0 Off 1 On 0 According to a preset schedule enable or disable Automatic Night Service for the system 12 02 12 03 12 04 Even if...

Page 176: ...omatic Night Service Patterns Level SA Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Time Pattern Number 01 10 Set Time Number 01 20 Item No Description Input Data 01 Start Time 0000 2359 02 End Time 0000 2359 03 Operation Mode 1 8 0 00 9 00 12 00 13 00 17 00 18 00 22 00 0 00 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 2 Mode 3 midnight day rest day rest night midnight Time setting 01 00 00 to 09 0...

Page 177: ...Night Service Time setting 07 22 00 to 00 00 Mode 3 midnight 0 00 0 00 Mode 2 night Time setting 01 00 00 to 00 00 Mode 2 night Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0800 2 02 0800 1700 1 03 1700 0000 2 04 0000 0000 1 20 0000 0000 1 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0000 2 02 0000 0000 1 20 0000 0000 1 Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0000 0000 1 20 0000 0000 1...

Page 178: ...t Mode Setup 12 03 Weekly Night Service Switching Level SA Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Item No Day of the Week Time Schedule Pattern Number 01 01 Sunday 0 10 02 Monday 03 Tuesday 04 Wednesday 05 Thursday 06 Friday 07 Saturday Day of the Week Time Schedule Pattern Number 01 Sunday 2 02 Monday 1 03 Tuesday 1 04 Wednesday 1 05 Thursday 1 06 Friday 1 07 Saturday 2 ...

Page 179: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 139 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service ...

Page 180: ...the setting of special days when the company is expected to be closed such as a national holiday Default No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 04 Holiday Night Service Switching Level SA Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Item No Days and Months Time Pattern Number 01 0101 1231 e g 0101 Jan 1 1231 Dec 31 0 10 0 No Setting ...

Page 181: ...for Extensions to assign a Day Night Mode Group for each extension Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Night Mode Service Group Number Default 01 01 32 1 ...

Page 182: ...ent for Trunks to assign a Day Night Mode Group for each trunk port Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 06 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Night Mode Service Group Number Default 01 01 32 1 ...

Page 183: ...ine telephone in each Mode Default Mode 1 No setting Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Midnight Mode 4 Rest Mode 5 Day2 Mode 6 Night2 Mode 7 Midnight2 Mode 8 Rest2 Conditions None Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 07 Text Data for Night Mode Level IN Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item No Text Message 01 Maximum 12 Characters alphabetic or numeric ...

Page 184: ...Issue 4 0 2 144 Program 12 Night Mode Setup Feature Cross Reference Night Service ...

Page 185: ...e When Program 12 08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed SC 751 09 0 the following modes are switched Press once Night Press twice Mid night Press third Day Default 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Service Program 12 Night Mode Setup 12 08 Night Mode Service Range Level IN Input Data Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Item No Range 01 2 8 default 2 ...

Page 186: ...Issue 4 0 2 146 Program 12 Night Mode Setup ...

Page 187: ...ing 0 or dial the bin as though it is an Intercom number 1 0 Trunk Outgoing Mode 1 Intercom Outgoing Mode 0 13 05 02 Not Used 03 Number of Common Speed Dialing Bins Assign the number of Speed Dial bins that are used for System Speed Dials 0 10000 0 No Common Speed Dialing 1000 13 04 04 Trunk Access Routing When set to 0 PRG13 05 defines a trunk group in PRG14 05 to select a trunk from When set to ...

Page 188: ...g group Refer to 13 03 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Speed Dial System Group Station Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 02 Group Speed Dialing Bins Level IN Input Data Item No Speed Dialing Group Number Start Address of Speed Dialing Bin End Address of Speed Dialing Bin 01 01 64 0 9990 0 9 9999 ...

Page 189: ... Speed Dialing Group for each extension There are 64 available Speed Dialing groups Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Speed Dial System Group Station Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 03 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Group Number Default Value 01 01 64 1 ...

Page 190: ...t Data Default Related Program 01 Speed Dialing Data 1 9 0 Pause Press line key 1 Recall Flash Press line key 2 Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN Press line key 3 max 24 digits No Setting 02 Name Maximum 12 Characters Use dial pad to enter name No Setting 03 Transfer Mode 0 Not Used 1 Internal Dial 2 Incoming Ring Group IRG 0 04 Transfer Destination Number If Transfer mode is Refer to 13...

Page 191: ...emo 3 Define Memo Display information tied to Common Speed Dial bin or Telephone Book which match with incoming Caller ID This will be displayed in LCD Line 3 Maximum of 28 digits No Setting 15 02 58 11 Mailbox Number Per Speed Dial Bin No 0000 9999 set the voice mail box number Incoming Caller ID number will be checked with Speed Dial Data PRG 13 04 01 From matched Speed Dial Bin No the system fi...

Page 192: ...Issue 4 0 2 152 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Speed Dial System Group Station ...

Page 193: ...en seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing of the caller s extension refer to Program 14 06 This setting is available only in External Speed Dialing Mode Program 13 01 01 Default No Setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Speed Dial System Group Station Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 05 Speed Dial Trunk Group Level SB Input Data Speed Dialing Bin Number 0 9999 Item No Trun...

Page 194: ...ed Dialing 13 07 Telephone Book Dial Number and Name Level SB Input Data Telephone Book Number 0 200 Index Data Telephone Book Entry 0 449 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Speed Dialing Data 1 9 0 Pause Press line key 1 Recall Flash Press line key 2 Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN Press line key 3 max 24 digits No Setting 02 Name Maximum 12 Characters Use dial pad to ...

Page 195: ...to set up the name of the Telephone Book Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 08 Telephone Book System Name Level SB Input Data Telephone Book Number 0 200 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Telephone Book Name Up to six characters No Setting ...

Page 196: ... the Telephone Book Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 09 Telephone Book Group Name Level SB Input Data Telephone Book Number 0 200 Item No Group Number 01 0 40 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Group Name Up to 12 characters 1 Group 01 2 Group 02 3 Group 03 40 Group 40 ...

Page 197: ...ng the Telephone Book Trunk outgoing mode follows Program 14 06 setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing 13 10 Telephone Book Routing Level SB Input Data Telephone Book Number 0 200 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Outgoing Mode 0 Trunk Outgoing 1 Intercom Outgoing 0 ...

Page 198: ...Issue 4 0 2 158 Program 13 Abbreviated Dialing ...

Page 199: ...ine 400 02 Transmit Level Select the CODEC gain for the trunk The option sets the gain signal amplification for the trunk you are programming 1 57 15 5dB 12 5dB in 0 5dB intervals 32 0dB 03 Receive Level Select the CODEC gain for the trunk The option sets the gain signal amplification for the trunk you are programming 1 57 15 5dB 12 5dB in 0 5dB intervals 32 0dB 04 Transmit Gain Level for Conferen...

Page 200: ...04 21 05 21 06 09 Private Line 0 Disable Private Line Normal 1 Enable Private Line Private Line 0 10 DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls Enable Disable DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 0 11 Account Code Required 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 12 Not Used 13 Trunk to Trunk Transfer Enable Disable loop supervision for the trunk This option is required for Call Forwarding Off Prem...

Page 201: ...m private to non private mode by pressing the line key or Privacy Release function key 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 0 20 Block Outgoing Caller ID Allow 1 Prevent 0 the system from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call If allowed i e block enabled the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code defined in 14 01 21 before the user dialed digits 0 Disa...

Page 202: ...Enable Yes 0 28 Effective of Conversation Recording Destination for Extension 0 No Effect No 1 Available Yes 1 15 12 30 Flexible Ringing by Caller ID 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 13 04 32 Anti trombone Function 0 No Effect No 1 Available Yes 0 33 APSU Trunk Receive Gain Additional PAD when a trunk call connects to APSU Voice Mail 1 57 15 5dB 12 5dB in 0 5dB intervals 32 0dB 35 DT800 DT700 Large LED...

Page 203: ...9 CLI Composition If select default value 0 prefer extension the extension s CLI is sent out if it is not empty If it is empty the trunk s CLI is sent instead If select value 1 combine trunk extension the trunk s CLI is stored in the sending buffer padded with the extension s CLI 0 Prefer Extension 1 Combine Trunk Extension 0 40 ISDN Queue Announcement Connect Mode 0 Send CONNECT 1 Send PROGRESS 8...

Page 204: ...Issue 4 0 2 164 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Refer to features in the Input Data table Trunk Port Number Name 1 Line 001 2 Line 002 400 Line 400 ...

Page 205: ...s option must be set to 1 for the trunks to ring and light correctly 0 Normal delayed 1 Immediate Ringing 1 03 Flash Type Select the flash type open loop flash or ground Always set this option for open loop flash 0 Open Loop Flash 1 Ground 0 04 Hooking Type Use Flash for Timed Flash Program 81 01 14 or Disconnect Program 81 01 15 A user implements Flash by pressing the FLASH key while on a trunk c...

Page 206: ...o DTMF dialing 0 Automatic 1 Automatic and Manual 2 Manual 2 21 01 03 08 Answering Condition 0 Polarity Reversing Polarity 1 Polarity Reversing or Timer Int Digit 1 21 01 03 09 Busy Tone Detection 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 0 10 Caller ID Enable Disable ability of a trunk to receive Caller ID information 0 No 1 Yes 0 11 Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone Enable Disable the system ability to skip ...

Page 207: ... calls or CO PBX ring transfer calls 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 18 Busy Tone Detection on Talking 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 19 Busy Tone Detection Frequency 1 255 1 14 02 18 20 Busy Tone Detection Interval 0 No 1 Yes 0 14 10 21 Fax Branch Connection 0 No 1 Yes 0 23 Caller ID Receiving Method Rings extension before receiving Caller ID 1 or after receiving Caller ID 0 0 Wait Caller ID 1 Immediate Ring 1 Item N...

Page 208: ...X There is one item for each mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Placing Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 04 Behind PBX Setup Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 1 400 Item No Day Night Mode Type of Connection Default Related Program 01 1 8 0 Stand Alone Trunk 1 Behind PBX PBX 2 Not Used 3 CTX assume 9 0 22 02 ...

Page 209: ... the group When users dial up the trunk group they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Trunk Groups Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 05 Trunk Group Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Trunk Group Number Priority Number 01 0 100 1 400 Trunk Port Group Priority 1 1 1 400 1 400 ...

Page 210: ...our priority orders for trunk access There are 100 available Trunk Group Numbers Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 06 Trunk Group Routing Level IN Example for setting With less than four trunk groups Route Number 1 Order 1 Trunk Group 1 Order 2 Trunk Group 2 For the above setting if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy the system searches for an idle line in trunk group 2 With more than four trun...

Page 211: ...r Routes 2 100 and Order Numbers 1 4 0 Not Specified Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Input Data Route Table Number 001 100 Item No Priority Order Number Input Data Related Program 01 1 4 0 Not Specified 001 100 Trunk Group No 101 150 100 Networking System No 1001 1100 1000 Route Table Number 14 01 07 14 05 15 01 02 21 02 ...

Page 212: ...Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map Default Access Maps 1 400 Trunk Ports 1 400 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 07 Trunk Access Map Setup Level IN NOTE 911 calls will override Program 14 07 settings Input Data Access Map Number 001 400 Item No Trunk Port Number Input Data 01 ...

Page 213: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 173 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing ...

Page 214: ...old Source for Trunks Level IN IMPORTANT If ACI is selected as the source in Item 1 the port number for the source must be selected in Item 2 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 MOH Type Select a Music on Hold source for the trunk 0 Internal synthesized external MOH 1 A customer provided source connected to BGM port 2 A customer provided source connected to ACI ...

Page 215: ...ion Recording Destination for Trunks Level IN NOTE If both Programs 14 09 and 15 12 define a destination the destination in Program 15 12 is followed Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 ACI Recording Destination Extension Number Enter the ACI extension number where the trunk calls should be recorded Maximum eight digits No Setting 02 ACI Automatic Recording for ...

Page 216: ...23 Conditions This Data is called IP trunk outgoing call or IP trunk incoming call This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call It is not notified when ID is 0 Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the partner system Feature Cross Reference IP Trunk H 323 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 11 ID Setup for IP Trunk Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Ite...

Page 217: ...r IP Trunk to define the SIP Register ID for IP Trunks Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 12 SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Register ID 0 31 0 02 Pilot Register ID 0 31 0 ...

Page 218: ... Cross Reference Key Common Channel Interoffice Signaling K CCIS Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 13 CCIS System Route ID Level IN Input Data Trunk Group Number 001 100 Item No Trunk Group Number Input Data Default Related Program 01 001 100 0 Not Assigned 1 8 CCIS Route IDs CCIS Route IDs 5 8 are for future use and should not be used 0 14 05 01 50 02 01 50 02 02 50 02 03 50 02 04 50 02 05 50 02 06...

Page 219: ...d consecutively for K CCIS to operate correctly The D Channel trunk port should not have a CIC assignment This is not used for IP CCIS Feature Cross Reference Key Common Channel Interoffice Signaling K CCIS Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup 14 14 CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Trunk Port Number Input Data Default Related Program 01 001 400 0 Not Assigned...

Page 220: ... 2 H 323 3 CCIS 0 02 System ID SIP Trunk This indicates NetLink System ID of the trunk when multiple SIP trunks for NetLink is enabled Read Only 0 50 0 03 P2P Mode SIP Trunk Select whether or not peer to peer connection method is used for the SIP Trunk 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 04 Video Mode SIP Trunk Select whether or not the Video mode is used for the SIP Trunk 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 05 SIP Profile 1 P...

Page 221: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 181 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 222: ...Issue 4 0 2 182 Program 14 Trunk Basic Setup ...

Page 223: ...xtension outgoing Trunk Line Preference If enabled the extension user receives trunk dial tone when they lift the handset The user hears trunk dial tone only if allowed by Trunk Access Map programming Programs 14 07 and 15 06 Refer to the Line Preference feature for more details 0 Off 1 On 0 14 06 21 02 03 SMDR Printout Include Exclude the extension in the SMDR report 0 Do not print on SMDR report...

Page 224: ...Number Sends caller name on outgoing ISDN calls 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 12 CCIS CPN Enable or Disable sending CPN to remote trunk via CCIS 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 13 Special Ringtone Choice 0 Incoming extension ring tone 1 Tone pattern 1 2 Tone pattern 2 3 Tone pattern 3 4 Tone pattern 4 5 Tone pattern 5 6 Tone pattern 6 7 Tone pattern 7 8 Tone pattern 8 0 15 02 03 14 SMDR Output of Intercom Calls Made ...

Page 225: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 185 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 226: ... select options 8 10 press either 8 or Recall then press line keys 1 3 Key 1 is option 8 Key 2 is option 9 and Key 3 is option 10 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Dutch 7 Portuguese 8 Norwegian 9 Danish 10 Swedish 11 Turkish 12 Latin American Spanish 13 Romanian 14 Polish 17 Simplified Chinese 18 Traditional Chinese 1 11 11 13 02 Trunk Ring Tone Set the tone pitch of th...

Page 227: ... can be for Call Transfer Serial Calling or Flash When selecting the Flash option selection 2 refer also to Program 81 01 14 0 Transfer 1 Call back 2 Hook 0 06 Hold Key Operating Mode Set the function of the Multiline Hold key The Hold key can activate normal Hold or Exclusive Hold 0 Normal Common 1 Exclusive Hold 0 07 Automatic Hold for CO Lines When talking on a CO call and another CO line key i...

Page 228: ...ok Signaling for an extension Class of Service use Program 20 13 06 0 Muted Off Hook Ringing 1 No Off Hook Ringing 2 Not Used 3 Beep in Speaker SP 4 Beep in Handset HS 5 Speaker Handset Beep 5 13 Outgoing Caller List Mode Select whether the Redial List feature should store internal and external numbers 0 or only external numbers 1 0 ICM Trunk Extension Trunk Mode 1 Trunk Mode 1 15 Storage of Calle...

Page 229: ... in If 22 01 01 is set to 0 for intercom priority the Hotline key does not light for incoming trunk calls but lights solid for intercom calls If 15 02 22 is disabled Hotline keys light solid for any incoming calls regardless of the setting in Program 22 01 01 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 22 01 01 23 Speed Dial Preview Mode Define how a speed dial key functions when pressed If set to Preview 0 the speed di...

Page 230: ... Message Waiting Lamp lights Green or Red when a message is received 0 Green 1 Red 1 15 02 35 15 02 36 15 02 37 15 02 38 29 PB Back Tone Level Allow adjustment of the PB Back Tone Level when you are calling an ISDN Line 1 57 15 5dB 12 5dB 32 0dB 30 Toll Restriction Class Select the Toll Restriction Class to use when placing a call from a virtual extension 0 Vir Ext Virtual Extension Class 1 Real E...

Page 231: ...ssage Waiting set to the extension 1 Cycle 1 2 Cycle 2 3 Cycle 3 4 Cycle 4 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 3 15 02 28 15 02 35 15 02 36 15 02 37 40 Additional Dial for Caller ID Call Return Enter the digits to be dialed in front of the Caller ID when using the Caller ID Return function Up to four digits 0 1 9 10 02 04 41 Incoming Ring Setup 0 Speaker Normal Ring 1 Headset Ring 0 42 Incoming Off Hook...

Page 232: ...0 0 Off 1 On 1 11 11 17 15 07 01 15 20 01 48 Short Ring Setup 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 80 09 01 49 Button Kit Information for Multiline Telephone 0 No setting 1 Not Used 2 Type A with Cursor Key 3 Type B with Cursor Key 4 9 Not Used 10 Type A for Overseas without Cursor Key Retrofit 11 Type B without Cursor Key Retrofit 0 90 48 01 51 Alarm Notification to other NetLink System 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 20 0...

Page 233: ... Blue 8 White 9 Rotation 3 73 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Calling Party History View Mode For saving multiple entries for the same number in case of different calling times set this to 1 For saving a single entry for the same number set this to 0 0 Pack 1 Unpack 0 74 Ten Key Backlit Control This program sets the brightness of the ten key backlighting When Set to Normal 0 brightness of ten...

Page 234: ...oming Signal Frequency Pattern 1 High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz External Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern 2 High Middle Low 1100Hz 660Hz 520Hz 1400Hz 760Hz 660Hz 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz External Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern 3 High Middle Low 2000Hz 1400Hz 1100Hz 760Hz 660Hz 540Hz 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz External Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern 4 High Middle Low 2000Hz 1400Hz 1100Hz 76...

Page 235: ...ditional digit This program change is automatically performed when the UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless telephone is registered When upgrading software from prior versions the previous default of 1 is saved from the prior database so this option must be changed manually 0 DP 1 DTMF 1 15 03 03 45 01 01 03 Terminal Type Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the init...

Page 236: ... 10 Caller ID Name Determine if an extension user telephone should display the Caller ID name 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 15 03 09 11 Caller ID Type Determine whether the Caller ID type is FSK or DTMF 0 FSK 1 DTMF 0 14 Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode Determine what the display shows when a multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside call 0 Calling Extension Number Calling 1 External Caller ID Forwar...

Page 237: ...0 Programming Manual 2 197 Conditions None 1 2 3 4 5 Outgoing Call Normal Idle Reverse Incoming Call Call Pickup 1 Off Hook 2 Calling Ringing 3 Answer 4 Detect Hang Up 5 On Hook Normal Idle Reverse Normal Idle Reverse ...

Page 238: ...Issue 4 0 2 198 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup Feature Cross Reference Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets ...

Page 239: ...0 00 to FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 MAC Address of registered SIP MLT phone is stored and or can input the MAC address of an SIP MLT phone so when it comes online it is provided with the extension in which the MAC address matches 15 05 01 04 Nickname Up to 48 characters No setting Nickname section on Invite message Example Extension 100 has a Nickname set to PAUL Extension 101 has command ...

Page 240: ... program that shows what type of adapter is installed on the telephone 10 03 10 21 Handset Option Information 0 Normal Handset 1 Handset for power failure PSA PSD 2 BCH 0 This is a read only program that shows what type of Handset is installed on the telephone 10 03 11 15 05 23 22 Side Option Additional Data 0 No Setting 1 32 DSS Console number 0 This is a read only program that shows the DSS cons...

Page 241: ... 960 0 Used when the SIP Multiline telephone is using manual auto registration Assign each phone a unique personal index Then go to command 84 22 to assign the user name and password 84 22 XX 28 Addition Information Setup 0 Do not inform 1 Inform 0 Select whether or not to inform of additional information 29 Terminal WAN side IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 30 DTMF Play during Conversat...

Page 242: ...g must be Automatic otherwise the terminal will ignore PRG 14 01 35 PRG 15 05 37 and PRG 15 23 settings 38 Paging Protocol Mode With V5000 or higher the default is 1 0 Multicast 1 Unicast 2 Auto 1 Sets the protocol mode for the Paging function 39 CTI Override Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Sets the override function against the terminal that is controlled by the CTI 40 Calling Name Display Info via Tru...

Page 243: ...ill be sent 45 NAT Plug Play 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Select sending RTP port number to remote router 0 uses result from negotiation result 1 from received RTP packet Effective only when 10 46 14 is to NAT Mode 10 46 14 46 Door Phone Number Read Only 0 Not assigned 1 8 Door Phone No 0 Indicates automatically assigned IP Door Phone Number after system registers the Door Phone port System assignes the n...

Page 244: ... time 2 Allowed while RTP is not available 1 Select whether or not system can receive DTMF from standard SIP phone via SIP INFO message There are two receive types 1 Allowed any time can receive a SIP INFO message from a standard SIP phone as a dial information any time 2 Allowed while RTP is not available can receive a SIP INFO message before establishing RTP connection 50 Peer to Peer Mode Off D...

Page 245: ... trunks to which it has outgoing access Use Program 14 07 to define the available access maps Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 06 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item No Trunk Access Map Number Default Related Program 01 1 400 1 14 0...

Page 246: ...up Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1 You can also program Function Keys using Service Codes To clear any previously programmed key press 000 to erase any displayed code Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 07 Programmable Function Keys Level SA Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Line Key Number Function Number Additional Data 01 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code Service Code 751 by default 0...

Page 247: ... Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 00 Not Defined 01 DSS One Touch Extension number or any numbers up to 24 digits Red On Extension Busy Off Extension Idle Rapid Blink Red DND or Call Forward 02 Microphone Key ON OFF Red On Mic Off Off Mic On 03 DND Key Red On DND 04 BGM ON OFF Red On BGM On Off BGM Off 05 Headset Red On Headset in use 06 Transfer Key None 07 Conference Key Red On Con...

Page 248: ...r to Internal Paging None 24 Call Pickup None 25 Call Pickup for Another Group None 26 Call Pickup for Specified Group Call Pickup Group Number None 27 Speed Dial Common Private Speed Dial Number Common Private None 28 Speed Dial Group Speed Dial Number Group None 29 Repeat Redial Red On Waiting to redial 30 Saved Number Redial None 31 Memo Dial None 32 Meet Me Conference None 33 Override Off Hook...

Page 249: ...le Rapid Blink Red DND or Call Forward Green Reverse Voice Over to extension in progress 48 Voice Over Slow Blink Red Voice Over Active 49 Call Redirect Extension Number or Voice Mail Number None 50 Account Code Red On While account code being entered 51 General Purpose Relay Relay No 0 1 8 Red On Relay On 52 Automatic Answer with Delay Message Setup Incoming Ring Group 001 100 Red On Under settin...

Page 250: ...Used 71 Not Used 72 Keypad Facility Key None 73 Keypad HOLD Key None 74 Keypad RETRIEVE Key None 75 Keypad Conference Key None 76 Application Key 3rd Party CTI Any dial data 8 digits None 77 Voice Mail Extension Number or Pilot Number InMail Fast Flash Green New Message s in own Mailbox Slow Flash Red New Message s in other Mailbox APSU VM00 External VM Red On Access to Voice Mail Fast Flash Green...

Page 251: ...age 84 Drop Key None 85 Not Used 86 Private Call Refuse None Slow Flash Set 87 Caller ID Refuse None Slow Flash Set 88 Dial In Mode Switching PRG 22 17 Table No 1 100 Off Pattern 1 Pattern 5 8 On Pattern 2 Slow flash Pattern 3 Fast flash Pattern 4 89 Do Not Call Setup 90 Do Not Call Data Registration 91 Live Recording Key SV8100 InMail 94 Call Attendant Fast flash Setup No Answer Calls Slow flash ...

Page 252: ...752 Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 00 ICM Key None Red On Off Hook on Intercom Call Red Blink Intercom Call on Hold 01 Trunk Key Trunk Number 001 400 Red On Trunk Busy by Another User Green On Trunk Busy by Extension 02 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number 001 100 Red On Trunk Busy by Another User Green On Trunk Busy by Extension 03 Virtual Extension Key Extension Number or Depa...

Page 253: ...ff Duty Slow Blink Red Under Reservation 14 Start End Red On Operation End 15 Terminal Speech Monitor Red On Under Monitor 16 Waiting Red On Standby 17 Work Wrap Up Time Red On Under Work Time Slow Blink Red Under Reservation 18 Overflow Control Group Number Red On Enable Slow Blink Red Disable 19 Queue Status Display Check 32 Warning Message On Red Play Warning Message Off Stop Warning Message 33...

Page 254: ...D Whispering On Red When using Contact Center Whispering 37 ACD Queue Alarm Display ACD Group No 01 64 On Red While displaying queue status Fast Flash Red Queue has more calls than PRG 41 02 06 Function Number List Continued 2 Appearance Function Level 00 99 Service Code 752 Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication ...

Page 255: ...can be programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 751 48 When assigning a CAP key 08 an orbit number must be used If orbit 000 is used it automatically assigns the next available orbit Feature Cross Reference Refer to Function Number List LED Indication Reference ON LED pattern 7 On OFF LED pattern 0 Off Rapid Blink LED pattern 3 RW Slow Blink General Function Level LED pattern 5 IL Slow Blink Appe...

Page 256: ...sion ports Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Incoming Ring Pattern Default Description 01 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone Pattern 4 4 Incoming Ring Tone Extension 5 Tone Pattern 5 6 Tone Pattern 6 7 Tone Pattern 7 8 Tone Pattern 8 0 Tone Pattern 1 When an extension or a vi...

Page 257: ...Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Pattern 1 High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz Pattern 2 High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Pattern 3 High Middle Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz Pattern 4 High Middle Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Internal Incoming Signal Frequency High Middle Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz ...

Page 258: ...numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15 01 Program Virtual Extension keys in Program 15 07 code 03 There are 512 Virtual Extension Ports Conditions Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Level SA Input D...

Page 259: ...15 Extension Basic Setup 15 10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup Level SA Input Data Extension Number 1 960 Item No Priority Order Data Description Related Program 01 1 4 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone Pattern 4 4 Incoming Extension Ring Tone 5 Tone Pattern 5 6 Tone Pattern 6 7 Tone Pattern 7 8 Tone Pattern 8 When two or more virtual extensions are set on ...

Page 260: ...Issue 4 0 2 220 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 261: ...1 to virtual extension ports Program Multiple Directory Number virtual extension keys in Program 15 07 code 03 Conditions Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming PRG 15 09 01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the CAR VE key to Delay Ring Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 11 Virtual Extens...

Page 262: ...tion Recording Destination for Extensions Level IN NOTE If both Programs 14 09 and 15 12 define a destination the destination in Program 15 12 is followed Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item Number Item Input Data Default 01 ACI Recording Destination Extension Number Enter the ACI extension number to which the trunk calls should be recorded Maximum eight digits No Setting 02 ACI Automatic Rec...

Page 263: ...erence Loop Key Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 13 Loop Key Data Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Key Number 01 48 Item Number Item Input Data Default 01 Outgoing Option 0 8 or 0 100 0 Assigns the Loop Key for ARS 1 100 Assigns the Loop Key to the trunk group specified Programmable Function Key Number 01 32 Outgoing Option 0 Assigns the Loop Key for ARS Incoming Option 0 Assigns th...

Page 264: ... any required trunk access codes for outside numbers If this bin information is changed either through 15 14 01 or through user programming the destination for the transferred calls is also changed Default No entries for any extension Conditions None Feature Cross Reference One Touch Keys Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 14 Programmable One Touch Keys Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 96...

Page 265: ...r Extension to define the SIP Register ID for Extensions Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 16 SIP Register ID Setup for Extension Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Item Input Data Default Profile 1 6 01 Register ID None 0 31 None ...

Page 266: ...ting LED Flash assignment on each CO line Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 17 CO Message Waiting Indication Level IN Input Data Extension Number including Virtual Extensions 001 960 Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 LED Flash Assignment 0 LED Off 1 LED On 0 ...

Page 267: ...Extension Key name or the name of the extension it resides on 0 Secondary Extension Name 1 Actual Station Name 0 03 Show CLI When set to a 0 the caller ID of a trunk call station call pointed to a virtual extension will not be displayed if the virtual extension is not set to ring When set to a 1 the caller ID of a trunk call pointed to a virtual extension WILL be displayed if the virtual extension...

Page 268: ... multiline terminal must have a CAP Key or CO Line Appearance Feature Cross Reference None 05 One Ring When set to a 0 the virtual extension follows the normal ring cycle When set to a 1 the virtual extension will only ring one time the virtual extension must be first set to ring in PRG 15 08 0 Normal Ring Cycle 1 One Ring 0 15 09 01 Item No Item Input Data Defaul t Related Program ...

Page 269: ...ions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 19 System Telephone Book Setup for Extension Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Telephone Book 1 0 200 Port 1 1 Port 2 2 Port 200 200 02 Telephone Book 2 0 200 0 06 Locking of Telephone Book 0 On 1 Off 0 07 Password 0000 9999 Fixed four digits 0000 ...

Page 270: ...00 telephones and ADM option Up to 13 characters can be assigned Default Settings Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Key Number 01 48 Name Assignment Up to 13 characters Line Key Name LK01 CO 001 LK08 CO 008 LK09 All Blank LK48 All Blank ...

Page 271: ...used to call when the Mobile extension is called 0 9999 0 No setting 1 9999 target of mobile extension 0 02 Connect Confirmation Select when a confirmation dial is required to allow the call to cut over to the called mobile number 0 Always 1 On Analog Line 2 Never 0 03 Trunk Access Code Select if the Normal or Individual Trunk access is used when making the call to the mobile number 0 Use normal t...

Page 272: ...Issue 4 0 2 232 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 273: ...hen the Virtual Extension rings Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 23 Incoming Virtual Extension Large LED Setup Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 DT800 DT700 Large LED Illumination Setup 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 5 Yellow 6 Purple 7 Light Blue 8 White 9 Rotation 5 ...

Page 274: ...ed as the SIP extension When Program 15 24 03 is set to 1 this Program cannot be changed from 0 0 0 0 except using PCProgramming 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 02 Call Procedure Port Call procedure port of the standard SIP terminal that is used as SIP extension 0 65535 5060 03 Registration Setting when REGISTER isn t used Enables or disables the Registration method An error will occur if Program ...

Page 275: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 235 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 276: ...m Input Data Default 01 Incoming Call Notify Event Enable or disables the screen number icon on display 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 02 Automatic Screen Change on Incoming Call Automatically changes display to show Incoming Call number 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 03 Automatic Display Setting While Idle This setting set which screen displays during the idle state 0 Disable 1 4 DESI less Page 0 04 Automatic Displa...

Page 277: ...s Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 27 Power Saving Setup Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Power Saving Group Number 0 Power Save Off 1 32 Power Save Group 0 02 Power Save during Power Failure 0 Disable Power supply 1 Enable Power cut off 0 ...

Page 278: ...1 Each BTH key must be assigned a unique Desk Terminal Key The following function keys are supported 00 ICM Key 23 Meet me Answer to Internal Paging 29 Repeat Redial 41 Buzzer 42 Boss Secretary Call Feature Cross Reference None Program 15 Extension Basic Setup 15 29 Setting of Function Key for BTH Handset Level IN Input Data Function Key number of BTH 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Key of ...

Page 279: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 239 ...

Page 280: ...Issue 4 0 2 240 Program 15 Extension Basic Setup ...

Page 281: ...ensions first 0 Normal Routing Priority 1 Easy UCD Routing Circular 0 16 02 03 Department Routing when Busy Auto Step Call Set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member Intercom callers to the extension can either hear busy or route to the first available department number This only occurs for calls to the extension directly not the department number assigned in Prog...

Page 282: ...matic 0 11 16 10 06 STG Withdraw Mode 0 Disable Camp On 1 Enable Overflow Mode 0 07 Call Recall Restriction for STG Determine whether or not an unanswered call transferred to a Department Group should recall the extension from which it was transferred 0 Disable Recall 1 Enable No Recall 0 08 Not Used 09 Department Hunting No Answer Time Set the time a call rings a Department group extension before...

Page 283: ...oup the extensions ring in order of their priority 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Calling Program 16 Department Group Setup 16 02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Level IN Input Data Extension Number 1 960 Item No Group Number Priority Default Description Related Program 01 1 64 1 9999 1 xxx See Note Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the ext...

Page 284: ...ilable Department Groups Default All extension groups No setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Calling Program 16 Department Group Setup 16 03 Secondary Department Group Level IN Input Data Department Extension Group Number 01 64 Item No Secondary Extension Number Extension Number Priority Order Description 01 1 16 Maximum 8 digits 0 9999 This program is set up when placing te...

Page 285: ...rict calls to up to eight department groups in Department Group Departmental Call Restriction Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 16 Department Group Setup 16 04 Call Restriction Between Department Groups Level IN Input Data Extension Department Group Number 1 64 Restricted Group Index 1 8 Restrict Department Group Number Description Default 0 64 Calls between members of different...

Page 286: ...Issue 4 0 2 246 Program 16 Department Group Setup ...

Page 287: ...telephones and certain analog trunks like DISA the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the port for this time The system releases the receiver after the time expires 25 07 01 06 Alarm Duration 0 64800 seconds 30 This time sets the duration of the alarm signal 11 12 05 07 Callback Ring Duration Time 0 64800 seconds 15 Callback rings an extension for this time 11 12 05 15 07 35 08 Trunk Queuing Callb...

Page 288: ... of Remote Inspection feature when the Target is in Off Hook Status 0 Off 1 On 0 Setting to On 1 allows an emergency call to be made when the inspection target is in off hook status 20 Progress Tone for Mobile Extension Setting 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 Setting on where the Progress Tone 1 or Ringback 0 is played to the Internal Caller until the call to the Mobile Extension is setup 80 01 Type 54 21 Re...

Page 289: ...blink Talking Green Lighting on Talking TEL LED Off Holding 60 IPM Green blink on holding TEL LED Off 02 Trunk Group Access Key Operating Mode Set the operating mode of the extension trunk group keys The keys are for incoming access outgoing access or both 0 Outgoing Incoming 1 Outgoing 2 Incoming 0 04 Retrieve the Line After Transfer Enable 1 Disable 0 an extension ability to answer a call after ...

Page 290: ...vision for the system trunks 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On 1 10 Time Before Shifting to Power Saving Mode 0 No shift 1 1 minute 2 2 minutes 3 4 minutes 4 8 minutes 5 16 minutes 6 32 minutes 7 64 minutes 0 15 02 18 11 Handsfree Microphone Control Control the setting for Multiline Terminal Handsfree microphone after being disconnected and reconnected If set to 0 the microphone is always off when the ter...

Page 291: ...pecial Operation Mode Loop Key 0 26 F Route Outgoing Mode From Incoming Call History Enable or Disable the ability to route Calls in the Call History via F Route if the leading digit s are set to F Route If set to 0 Off all Calls are routed via Normal Trunk Routing If Set to 1 On if the leading digit s are set to F Route in PRG 11 01 or 11 20 the call will follow that F Route Programming 0 Off 1 O...

Page 292: ...nore Yes 0 15 03 01 03 SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines Type 0 The system keeps the digits dialed by the single line telephone on a trunk in a buffer After all the digits are received the system sends all the digits to the trunk If the time space between digits is longer than the time in Item 4 the system considers all digits received Type 1 The system passes the received digits from the single line t...

Page 293: ...his option to 1 In addition set Program 20 03 03 to 1 0 64800 seconds 3 20 03 03 05 SLT Operation Mode 0 Normal Mode 1 Extended Mode 1 2 Extended Mode 2 0 06 Headset Ringing Start Time for SLT Define the headset ringing start time After this time expires from the time when a single line telephone is off hook the system sets the single line telephone to headset ringing mode 0 64800 seconds 5 20 13 ...

Page 294: ...tensions Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 03 CAR SIE Virtual Extension Delay Interval CAR Keys SIE Keys Virtual Extensions set for Delayed Ringing see Program 15 11 ring the extension after this time 0 64800 seconds 10 04 Virtual Extension Key Seize Mode Change the BLF status of a SIE key When set to Enhanced the BLF does not show as being busy when the station is on a trunk cal...

Page 295: ...f Service refer to Programs 20 07 through 20 13 You make eight entries for Program 20 06 one for each Night Service Mode Default Extension number 101 as Class 15 All other extension numbers are set as Class 1 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Class of Service Program 20 System Option Setup 20 06 Class of Service for Extensions Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Day Night Mo...

Page 296: ...r manual Night Service Switching 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 01 02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone Turn off or on an extension to change the Music on Hold tone 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 02 03 Time Setting Turn off or on an extension to set the Time via Service Code 728 0 Off 1 On 1 1 11 10 03 04 Storing Speed Dialing Entries Turn off or on an extension to store System or Group Speed Dialing numbers 0 Off 1 On...

Page 297: ...neral Message Record Delete Turn off or on an extension user ability to dial Service Code 612 and record listen to or erase the General Message 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 22 18 SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension Data 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 23 19 SMDR Printout Department Group STG Data 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 24 20 SMDR Printout Accumulated Account Code Data 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 25 21 Register and delete DEC...

Page 298: ... Mode Switch 0 Off 1 On 0 0 11 10 35 27 Do Not Call Administrator 0 Off 1 On 0 0 25 01 07 15 07 89 20 01 19 28 Not Used 30 Date Setting 0 Off 1 On 1 1 11 10 41 34 Clear Alarm Report 0 Off 1 On 0 1 35 Save Statistical Information for RTP 0 Off 1 On 0 1 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program COS 1 14 COS 15 ...

Page 299: ...n 1 1 02 Trunk Outgoing Calls Turn off or on outgoing trunk calling for the extension 0 Off 1 On 1 1 03 System Speed Dialing Turn off or on an extension ability to make outbound calls using system speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On 1 1 04 Group Speed Dialing Turn off or on an extension ability to make outbound calls using group speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On 1 1 05 Dial Number Preview Preset Dial Turn o...

Page 300: ... Off 1 On 0 0 10 03 05 15 01 04 14 Call Address Information 0 Off 1 On 0 0 15 Block Outgoing Caller ID Turn off or on the system ability to automatically block outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call If this option is on the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code defined in Program 14 01 21 before the user dialed digits 0 Off 1 On 0 0 14 01 20 14 01 21 16 Display E9...

Page 301: ...he speaker key 0 Off 1 On 0 0 22 Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension Turn off or on an extension user ability to make Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 23 Display Indication for Security Sensor Detection Enable 1 or Disable 0 an extension s ability to display indication for security sensor detection 0 Off 1 On 0 0 24 Display Indication for Emergency Call by Remote Inspection Ena...

Page 302: ...ne caller With this option set to 1 the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting 0 Off 1 On 1 1 02 Caller ID Display Turn off or on th...

Page 303: ... calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy 0 Off 1 On 1 1 20 13 06 08 Calling Party Information Turn off or on an extension ability to display calling party information on CCIS calls 0 Off 1 On 1 1 50 02 05 10 Not Used 11 Not Used 13 DND Active While Ringing When set to 0 and if set DND during an incoming call the call for the terminal stops immediately When set to 1 and if set DN...

Page 304: ...roup Call Pickup Another Group Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group Service Code 769 0 Off 1 On 1 1 03 Group Call Pickup for Specific Group Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific group Service Code 768 0 Off 1 On 1 1 04 Telephone Call Pickup Enable disable the group call pickup 0 Off 1 On 1 1 05 Directed Call Pickup for Own Group Turn off or on Directed Call ...

Page 305: ...ility to answer an incoming call on a Call Arrival CAR Secondary Incoming Extension SIE Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset 0 Off 1 On 1 1 09 Call Pickup Callback Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Pickup to pick up Callback calls 0 Off 1 On 1 1 10 Answer Preset 0 Off 1 On 0 0 Item No Item Input Data Default COS 01 14 COS 15 ...

Page 306: ...n Busy Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Forward when Busy 0 Off 1 On 1 1 03 Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Forward when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On 1 1 04 Call Forwarding Both Ringing Turn off or on an extension user ability to activate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing 0 Off 1 On 1 1 05 Call Forwarding with Follow Me Turn off or ...

Page 307: ...r Hold Callback Turn off or on an extension user ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator 0 Off 1 On 0 0 14 Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Turn off or on the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is not possible 0 Off 1 On 0 0 15 VRS Personal Greeting Message Greeting Turn off or on an extension user ability to record listen to o...

Page 308: ... ability to receive callbacks 0 Off 1 On 0 0 21 Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up Allow Deny an extension user ability to set up a tandem conference call automatically when they hang up 0 Off 1 On 0 0 22 Restricted Unsupervised Conference Allow Deny an extension user ability to initiate an unsupervised conference 0 Off 1 On 0 0 23 CAR VE Call Forward Set Cancel Turn 0ff or on an extension...

Page 309: ...tension when the other paired extension is busy not idle 0 Normal 1 Enhanced 0 0 30 Disable Call FWD Indication on LCD When set to 1 Call FWD setting is not shown on the terminal LCD 0 Off 1 On 1 1 31 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer to Remote Conference Use this option to enable or disable an extensions ability to transfer a call to a remote conference 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 ...

Page 310: ...vailability for each extension service class Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Class of Service Program 20 System Option Setup 20 12 Class of Service Options Charging Cost Service Level IN Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item No Item Input Data Default COS 01 14 COS 15 02 Advice of Charge ISDN AOC 0 Off 1 On 0 0 03 Cost Display TTU 0 Off 1 On 1 1 ...

Page 311: ...toff Incoming Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls 0 Off 1 On 0 0 03 Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls 0 Off 1 On 0 0 04 Call Forward DND Override Bypass Call Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Call Forwarding DND Override 0 Off 1 On 1 1 05...

Page 312: ...nal sending while talking on extension 0 Off 1 On 1 1 14 Department Calling PLT No Called Extension Turn off or on an extension user ability to call a Department Group Pilot 0 Off 1 On 1 1 15 Barge In Initiate Turn off or on an extension user ability to barge in on other s calls 0 Off 1 On 0 0 16 Barge In Receive Turn off or on an extension user ability to have other extensions barge in on calls 0...

Page 313: ...d Busy Call Forward No Answer DND 0 Off 1 On 0 0 24 Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key Turn off or on a user ability to press a line key to barge into an outside call The Barge In feature must be enabled if this option is used 0 Off 1 On 0 0 25 Not Used 26 Group Listen Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Group Listen 0 Off 1 On 1 1 27 Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension If set to 1 you...

Page 314: ...m waits until the interdigit time Program 21 01 01 expires before beginning this timer 0 Off 1 On 1 1 37 Not Used 38 Headset Ringing for SLT Turn off or on an extension user ability to use the Headset ringing 0 Off 1 On 0 0 39 Queue Status Display Turn off or on the Queue Status Display for an extension Class of Service Any extension which has this option enabled also receives the queue alarm 0 Of...

Page 315: ...l is ringing the phone 0 Off 1 On 0 0 50 AIC Agent display which call is from Determine if the station logged in via AIC code shows which queue the call is coming from 0 Off 1 On 1 1 51 Number and Name Appear in the Directory Determine if an extension name and number are listed 1 or unlisted 0 in the directory 0 Off 1 On 1 1 52 VoIP All DSP Busy Display Set whether All DSP Busy alarm displays on L...

Page 316: ... 01 15 Item No Item Input Data Default COS 1 15 01 First Digit Absorbtion Delete First Digit Dialed For tie lines enable disable the ability to absorb ignore the first incoming digit Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3 and 4 digit tie line service This option does not apply to DISA 0 Off 1 On 0 02 Trunk Group Routing ARS Access Enable Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial...

Page 317: ... to use Direct Trunk Access Service Code 9 0 Off 1 On 0 09 Forced Trunk Disconnect Not for ISDN T point Enable Disable a tie trunk caller ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect Service Code 3 This option is not available to DISA callers 0 Off 1 On 0 10 Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA Enable Disable a DISA caller ability to use the Call Forward service codes Programs 11 11 01 11 11 05 0 Off...

Page 318: ...ing Cycle Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Incoming Signal Type Ringing Cycle Default 01 Normal Incoming Call on Trunk 1 13 2 02 PBX CES Incoming Call 8 03 Incoming Internal Call 12 04 DID DISA VRS 8 05 DID DDI DIL 8 06 Dial In in the E M Tie Line 12 07 Door Box Ringing for SLT 8 08 Virtual Extension Ring 8 09 Callback 11 10 Alarm for SLT 5 11 VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call 6 ...

Page 319: ... 4 0 3 On 1 0 Off 2 0 4 On 0 5 Off 0 5 5 On 0 25 Off 0 25 6 On 0 5 Off 0 5 On 0 5 Off 1 5 7 On 0 25 Off 0 25 On 0 25 Off 5 25 8 On 0 375 Off 0 25 On 0 375 Off 2 0 9 On 0 25 Off 0 125 On 0 25 Off 0 125 On 0 25 Off 2 0 10 On 1 0 Off 4 0 11 On 0 25 Off 0 25 On 0 25 Off 4 25 12 On 1 0 Off 3 0 13 On 0 25 Off 0 25 On 0 25 Off 2 25 ...

Page 320: ...Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü Enter characters π Σ Ω Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Spa...

Page 321: ...essage Number 01 20 Item No Input Data 01 24 characters Number Message 1 IN MEETING UNTIL 2 MEETING ROOM 3 COME BACK 4 PLEASE CALL 5 BUSY CALL AFTER 6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK 7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK 8 BUSINESS TRIP 9 GONE FOR THE DAY 10 ON VACATION UNTIL 11 MESSAGE 11 12 MESSAGE 12 13 MESSAGE 13 14 MESSAGE 14 15 MESSAGE 15 16 MESSAGE 16 17 MESSAGE 17 18 MESSAGE 18 19 MESSAGE 19 20 MESSAGE 20 ...

Page 322: ...Issue 4 0 2 282 Program 20 System Option Setup Conditions Time value must be followed by two spaces Feature Cross Reference Selectable Display Messages ...

Page 323: ...am If you do not assign an extension in Program 90 11 01 system alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Intercom Program 20 System Option Setup 20 17 Operator Extension Level IN Input Data Operator Number 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Operator s Extension Number Define the extension numbers to be used by operators Up t...

Page 324: ...Timer 0 64800 seconds 15 03 Congestion Tone 0 64800 seconds 10 A Busy Tone when system resources run short such as DTMF receiver resources 04 Call Waiting Tone Timer 0 64800 seconds 10 Sets the time between Call Waiting tones This timer also sets the time between Off Hook Signaling alerts 05 Multiline Confirmation Tone 0 64800 seconds 10 06 Interval of Call Waiting Tone 3 64800 seconds 10 07 Intru...

Page 325: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 285 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns ...

Page 326: ...ation Waiting Time 0 30 5 03 Caller ID Edit Mode 0 Off 1 On 0 04 Wait Facility IE Timer This timer is used with ISDN trunks to determine the time the system waits for the Caller ID name from the Telco 0 64800 seconds 10 05 Caller ID Sender Queing Time Sender Wait 0 64800 seconds 0 07 Long Distance Code Up to two digits 1 08 Area Code Up to six digits No setting 09 Calling Party Name for ISDN Trunk...

Page 327: ...ming Manual 2 287 Conditions Edit Caller ID works when Program 20 19 07 and Program 20 19 08 are set Calling Party Name for ISDN Trunk works when Program 14 01 24 and Program 15 01 01 are set Feature Cross Reference Caller ID ...

Page 328: ...on is received Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Caller ID Program 20 System Option Setup 20 20 Message Setup for Non Caller ID Data Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Private Call 24 Alphanumeric Characters PRIVATE 02 Call from Out of Service Area 24 Alphanumeric Characters OUT OF AREA 03 Call Information with Error 24 Alphanumeric Characters NO CALLER INFO ...

Page 329: ...on Alarm 1 The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after this time 0 64800 sec 170 14 01 15 02 Long Conversation Alarm 2 After the initial long toll call warning tone additional warning tones sound after this time 0 64800 sec 180 14 01 15 03 Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call This determines the time the system waits before disconnecting an incoming call 0 64800 sec 0 14 01 14 04 Long ...

Page 330: ...f the time defined here expires before the Wireless DECT phone starts to ring the system determines the phone is out of range and provides the out of range services indicates out of range transfers the call to voice mail or to another extension Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Wireless DECT Program 20 System Option Setup 20 22 System Options for Wireless DECT Service Level IN Input Data Ite...

Page 331: ...imer for CTI 0 64800 sec 30 02 ALERT replay time CTI 0 64800 sec 8 03 Trunk Virtual Bridge TSP Driver Enable Disable the system to send trunk or virtual extension information to the TSP driver 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 0 04 The Timer that waits for an off hook for Single Line Telephone 0 64800 sec 30 05 UX5000 Migration Mode Define if the CTI integration should operate in UX5000 mode On 1 or SV910...

Page 332: ...n the SETUP message the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first digit instead of the network 0 Off 1 On 0 05 T305 Timer Start After Sending Disconnect Message 0 Off 1 On 1 06 Call Proceeding Send Mode 0 Off 1 On 1 07 Local Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect Message Received 0 Local Busy Tone Off 1 Busy Tone from NT network side 0 08 Use of Lower Layer Compatibility LLC This Program m...

Page 333: ... Release Busy tone send when T point receiving a RELEASE message from Network 0 Off 1 On 0 14 No Response Release Send Operation mode setting for when second T303 timer expires 0 Off 1 On 0 15 Call Reference Selection for PRI 2B Channel Transfer This PRG is used to turn on or off the ability for an incoming call to be transferred Trunk to Trunk to an outgoing call when 2 B Channel Transfer is used...

Page 334: ...er Changing CO to define the Multiplier for charging cost to each extension service class Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 26 Multiplier Changing CO Level IN Input Data Service Class 1 15 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Value 100 500 100 ...

Page 335: ...ed to continue the conversation after the Trunk to Trunk Release Warning Tone is heard 0 9 Set for one digit only No Setting 14 01 25 20 28 03 24 02 07 24 02 10 25 07 07 25 07 08 02 Conversation Disconnect Code Input the code that can be dialed to disconnect the conversation after the Trunk to Trunk Release Warning Tone is heard 0 9 Set for one digit only No Setting 14 01 25 24 02 07 24 02 10 25 0...

Page 336: ...ntries for this Program one for each Night Service Mode This entry includes virtual extension numbers The details of classes are assigned by Program 20 31 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 29 Timer Class for Extension Level IN Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Day Night Mode 1 8 Class Number 0 15 0 Not ass...

Page 337: ...signed You make eight entries for this Program one for each Night Service Mode The details of classes are assigned by Program 20 31 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 30 Timer Class for Trunks Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Day Night Mode 1 8 Class Number 0 15 0 Not assigned 0 ...

Page 338: ...09 03 CAR SIE Virtual Extension Delay Interval CAR Keys SIE Keys Virtual Extensions set for Delayed Ringing refer to 15 11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment ring the extension after this time 0 64800 seconds 10 seconds 20 04 03 04 Intercom Interdigits Time Intercom I D Timer When placing Intercom calls extension users must dial each digit in this time 0 64800 seconds 10 seconds 21 01 02 05...

Page 339: ...old A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an extension for this time This time works with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time After this time the system invokes the Hold Recall Time again Cycling between time Program 24 01 01 and 24 01 02 and Program 24 01 06 and 24 01 07 continues until a user answers the call 0 64800 seconds 30 seconds 24 01 02 12 Exclusive Hold Recall Time A call left on Exc...

Page 340: ...nversation Disconnect Trunk to Trunk This determines the time the system waits before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 10 seconds 25 07 08 21 DISA Internal Paging Time This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this time ...

Page 341: ... These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to 15 in 20 29 01 or 20 30 01 When the timer class is set to 0 the system wide timer is used All defaults are the same as the system wide timers Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 342: ...rence Maximum Participants Set the maximum number of allowed participants for each conference 0 32 Default for conferences 1 4 8 Default for conferences 5 20 0 04 Remote Conference Maximum Conference Duration Set the time limit in seconds for each conference 0 64800sec 7200 05 Remote Conference Ending Conference Alert Tone Time Set the time for the conference end time alert tone to be played 0 648...

Page 343: ...ecording for a Remote Conference If disabled a line key must be used to start recording 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 Conference Group Setup Destination Mail Box Enter the mailbox number where recordings are to be stored Note This is the mailbox number not the extension number for a mailbox Enter mailbox number 1 896 Not Set Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 344: ...ator Setting to assign an extension to an operator group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 35 Extension s Operator Setting Level IN Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Extension s Operator Setting 0 15 0 ...

Page 345: ...trunk to an operator group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 36 Trunk s Operator Setting Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Trunk s Operator Setting Allow the user to select Operator Group per trunk 0 15 0 Not assigned 0 ...

Page 346: ...to define the operator s in the operator group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 37 Operator Extension Group Setup Level IN Input Data Operator Group 1 15 Operator Number 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Operator Extension Group Setup Up to eight digits None ...

Page 347: ...telephone Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 38 Operator Group Setting Level IN Input Data Operator Group 1 15 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Operator Access Mode Assign if the operator is called starting with the first operator every time 0 or a different operator is tried first 1 0 Step 1 Circular 0 ...

Page 348: ...efault 01 Internal Paging Group for Watch Message Define Internal Paging Group Number for Watch Mode 0 No Internal Paging 1 1 64 Paging Group 0 02 External Paging Group for Watch Message Define External Paging Group Number for Watch Mode 0 No Internal Paging 1 1 8 Paging Group 0 03 VRS Message for Watch Mode Define VRS number used for Watch Message 0 Warning Tone 1 100 VRS Message Number 0 04 Inte...

Page 349: ... Level IN Input Data Terminal 1 6 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Ring Terminal for Remote Monitor Extension Number Up to 8 digits No Setting 02 Ring Time Setting 0000 2359 00 00 03 Ring Timer 0 60 0 04 Auto Dial Number Area Setting 0 9999 9999 05 VRS Answer for Message 0 100 0 06 VRS Message for Auto Dial 0 100 0 07 Time of Repeat Auto Dial 0 255 0 08 Auto Dial Calling Time 0 10 3600 0 09 Inte...

Page 350: ...rnal Paging Group for Warning Message 0 No External Paging 1 8 Paging Group 0 04 VRS Message for Warning 0 Warning Tone 1 100 VRS Warning No 0 05 Auto Dial Number Area Setting 0 9999 9999 06 VRS Message for Answer 0 Warning Tone 1 100 VRS Warning No 0 07 Auto Dial Wait Timer 0 Report Immediately 1 64800 sec 10 08 Time of Repeat Auto Dial 0 No Repeat 1 255 times 3 09 Auto Dial Call TIme 0 No Report...

Page 351: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 311 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 352: ...r Watch Mode to assign the Watch Mode time pattern Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 47 Time Pattern Setting for Watch Mode Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Watch Mode Define the Watch Mode on off against time pattern 1 8 0 Off 1 On 0 ...

Page 353: ...or to assign the Security Sensor time pattern Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 48 Time Pattern Setting for Security Sensor Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Security Sensor Define the Security Sensor on off against time pattern 1 8 0 Off 1 On 0 ...

Page 354: ...ght Mode Service Group Number into the Power Save Group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 53 Night Mode Group Assignment for Power Save Group Level IN Index Data Power Save Group 1 32 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Defaul t 01 Night Mode Service Group Number Related PRG12 02 XX PRG20 54 1 32 1 ...

Page 355: ...n the Power Saving Mode in each Power Saving group and Night mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 54 Power Supply Mode for each Power Save Group Level IN Index Data Power Save Group 1 32 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Power Saving Mode 0 Power Cut 1 Power Supply 1 ...

Page 356: ...Delay Timer Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 55 Delay Timer for Security Sensor Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Sensor Delay Timer The sensor starts after waiting the interval of time set in this setting A setting of 0 results in immediate start 0 3600 sec 0 Immediate start 60 ...

Page 357: ...C Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 57 UC User Information Settings Level IN Index Data User Information Table Number 1 128 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 User ID Up to 16 characters No setting 02 Password Up to 16 characters No setting 41 Extension Number Dial Up to eight digits No setting ...

Page 358: ...Disable 1 Enable 0 04 UC Server Presence States In a Meeting 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 05 UC Server Presence States Out to Lunch 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 06 UC Server Presence States Sick 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 07 UC Server Presence States Gone for the Day 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 08 UC Server Presence States Out of the Office 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 UC Server Presence States Unavailable 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 10 ...

Page 359: ...ting 15 UC Server Custom Presence 2 Use 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 16 UC Server Custom Presence 3 Definition Any characters No setting 17 UC Server Custom Presence 3 Use 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 18 UC Server Custom Presence 4 Definition Any characters No setting 19 UC Server Custom Presence 4 Use 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 360: ... UC User ID Any character No setting 02 UC User Password Any character No setting 03 UC DT Client 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 04 UC DT Web Client 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 05 UC Deskset Extension 0 9 No setting 06 UC Softphone Extension 0 9 No setting 07 UC IM Allow 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 08 UC Shared Data Allow 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 UC Global Presence Change Allow 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 10 UC Message Feature A...

Page 361: ...Deskset 2 Softphone Deskset 1 15 UC Login Mode 0 Softphone 1 Deskset 1 16 UC Attendant Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 17 UC Trial Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 18 UC Voicemail Interface 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 19 UC Agent Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 20 UC Abandon Callback 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 21 UC CRM Integration 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 362: ...tions for the UC Server Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 60 UC Server Telephony Settings Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 UC Server Consult Call for Immediate Transfer 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 UC Server Emergency Number 0 9 No setting 03 UC Server Exception Table 0 99 0 ...

Page 363: ...eature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 61 UC Server Call Alerts Feature Settings Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 UC Server Abandon Call Alerts 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 UC Server Minimum Wait Time 00 00 23 59 00 00 03 UC Server Clear Call Timer 00 00 23 59 00 00 04 UC Server Clear Call If Matching Caller ID Returns to Queue 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 ...

Page 364: ...C Exception Table to set the Exception Table parameters Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 62 UC Exception Table Level IN Index Data User Exception Table Number 1 99 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Dial Data 0 9 No Setting ...

Page 365: ...n Setting to set the UC Web application Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 20 System Option Setup 20 64 UC Web Application Setting Level SA Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Web Conference Duration Timer 0 64800 7200 02 End Alert for Web Conference 0 64800 300 ...

Page 366: ...Default 01 Pilot Extension Number 0 MDG Attach 1 MDG Detach No Setting 02 Member Extension Number 1 0 MDG Attach 1 MDG Detach No Setting 03 Member Extension Number 2 0 MDG Attach 1 MDG Detach No Setting 04 Member Extension Number 3 0 MDG Attach 1 MDG Detach No Setting 05 Member Extension Number 4 0 MDG Attach 1 MDG Detach No Setting 06 Member Extension Number 5 0 MDG Attach 1 MDG Detach No Setting...

Page 367: ...01 Server Type Define the Server type as Disable STUN or TURN 0 Disable 1 STUN 2 TURN 0 02 IP Address Server Name Define the IP Address or Server Name Max 128 characters No Setting 03 Port Number Define the port number of the Server 0 65535 3478 04 Authentication Name Set the authentication name if the server needs authentication otherwise leave blank Max 32 characters No Setting 05 Password Set t...

Page 368: ...Issue 4 0 2 328 Program 20 System Option Setup ...

Page 369: ...ircular Route 0 14 05 14 06 02 Intercom Interdigit Time When placing Intercom calls an extension user must dial each digit in this time 0 64800 sec 10 03 Trunk Interdigit Time External The system waits for this time to expire before placing the call in a talk state Call Timer starts after time expires Voice Over and Barge In are not allowed until after time expires 0 64800 sec 5 14 02 08 04 Dial T...

Page 370: ...sion Timer Hotline Start A Ringdown extension automatically calls its programmed destination after this time 0 64800 sec 5 20 08 09 21 11 10 Dial Digits for Toll Restriction Path If this option is programmed with an entry other than 0 a call does not have a talk path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing an outgoing call This means that an entry of...

Page 371: ...ng Line feature 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On 0 15 01 05 21 01 16 21 01 17 16 Supervise Dial Detection Timer With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature if dial tone is not detected after the extension answers an incoming line the system determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver 0 64800 sec 20 15 01 05 21 01 16 21 01 17 17 Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on ...

Page 372: ...Issue 4 0 2 332 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Placing ...

Page 373: ...assign Program 14 06 routes to extensions Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Day Night Mode Route Table Number Default Related Program 01 1 8 0 100 0 No Setting 1 14 06 14 01 07 ...

Page 374: ...tic External Call Forward The Route Table is set in Program 14 06 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Trunk Group Routing Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Day Night Mode Route Table Number Default Related Program 01 1 8 0 100 0 No setting 1 14 06 14 07 01 ...

Page 375: ... in Program 21 05 and 21 06 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Level IN NOTE A telephone and a trunk have a Restriction Class The higher class applies for outgoing calls Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Day Night Mode Restriction Class Default Related Program 01 1 9 9 Power Failure Mode 1 15 2 14 01 08 ...

Page 376: ... 02 International Call Permit Code Table 0 Unassigned No 1 Assigned Yes 1 3 15 0 2 1 Assign Unassign the International Call Permit Table for the Toll Restriction Class you are programming Enter International Call Permit Table data in Program 21 06 02 21 06 02 03 Not Used 04 Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment 1 4 Table 0 Disable None 1 2 6 15 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 Select the table defined in 21 06 0...

Page 377: ...oup Speed Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers 11 Intercom Call Restriction 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 0 Determine if incoming intercom calls are restricted 12 PBX Call Restriction 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 6 8 15 0 7 1 Set how the system Toll Restricts calls over PBX trunks If you enable PBX Toll Restriction the system begins Toll Restriction after the PBX access...

Page 378: ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 06 Common Restrict Table 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 07 Permit Code Table 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 08 Restrict Code Table 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 09 Restriction for Common Abbr Dials 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 Restriction for Group Abbr Dials 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 Intercom Call Restriction 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 Restriction of PBX Calls 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 379: ... Tables 1 20 No Setting Program the Permit Table for international calls The system has 20 International Call Permit Tables Each entry can have up to six digits 03 Maximum Number Digits Table Assignment 1 4 4 30 Tables 1 4 30 Select the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table 04 Common Permit Code Table 1 10 Dial Up to four digits Table 1 911 Table 2 1800 Table 3 1888 Tab...

Page 380: ...stem restricts calls exactly as you enter the code 08 PBX Access Code 1 4 Dial Up to two digits Table 1 4 No Setting Enter the PBX Access Code When the system is behind a PBX this is the code users dial to access a PBX trunk Toll Restriction begins after the PBX access code For PBX trunks Program 14 04 the system only Toll Restricts calls that contain the access code Always program this option whe...

Page 381: ...V9100 Programming Manual 2 341 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 10 Outgoing Call Code Setup 1 20 Dial Up to four digits No Setting Input Data Continued Item No Item Table Input Data Default Description ...

Page 382: ...ve four digits using any combination of 0 9 and Each extension can have a separate code or many extensions can share the same override code Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Level SA Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Password Default Related Program 01 Four Digits Fixed No Setting 21 01 07 20 08 06 ...

Page 383: ... a Repeat Redial automatically repeats if the call does not go through 0 255 3 02 Repeat Redial Interval Time Set the time between Repeat Redial attempts 0 64800 sec 60 03 Repeat Dial Calling Timer After dialing the trunk call Repeat Redial maintains the call after this time After this time the system terminates the call waits the Repeat Redial Time Timer 02 and tries again 0 64800 sec 30 04 Time ...

Page 384: ...ck is available for all Classes of Service everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 09 Dial Block Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block feature is used 1 15 15 02 Supervisor Password ...

Page 385: ...extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction If this data is 0 Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21 09 01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 10 Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Toll Restriction Class Default 01 0 1 15 0 No Setting 0 ...

Page 386: ...M Auto Attendant This code can be used only on ISDN outbound calls Internal calls and analog outbound calls are not supported Feature Cross Reference Ringdown Extension Internal External Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 11 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Hotline Destination Number Default Related Program 01 0 Pause Hook Flash Code to wait...

Page 387: ...ssigned Program 21 13 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21 12 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Level IN NOTE If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21 12 and 21 13 the system sends the data in Program 21 13 Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 ...

Page 388: ... have an Extension Calling Number assigned Program 21 13 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21 12 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference ISDN Compatibility Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Level IN NOTE If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21 12 and 21 13 the system sends the data in Progra...

Page 389: ...ing Toll Restriction Each code has six digits using any combination of 0 9 and Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Toll Restriction Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 14 Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup Level SA Input Data ID Table Number 1 500 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 User ID Dial Six digits No Setting 02 Walking Toll Restriction Class Number 1 15 1 ...

Page 390: ...cess Code when setting up alternate trunk codes Refer to 14 06 Trunk Group Routing to set up the trunk routes When entering data for this option enter the route number or 0 to prevent routing Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Placing Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Day...

Page 391: ...n System A tries to make an external call using a trunk in System B The route number is specified for each system ID 01 50 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Placing Networking NetLink Networking Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 16 Trunk Group Routing for Networking Level IN Input Data System ID 01 50 Item No Day Night Mode Route Table Number Default Related Program 01 1...

Page 392: ...P calling party number for individual trunks Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 17 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Description Input Data Default 01 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk Up to 16 digits 0 9 None ...

Page 393: ...an outgoing call Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 18 IP Trunk H 323 Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Level IN NOTE When the Calling Party Number is assigned by PRG 21 17 21 18 and 21 19 the system uses the data in PRG 21 18 and PRG 21 19 Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Description Input Data Default 01 IP Trunk H 323 Calling Party N...

Page 394: ... an individual extension Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 19 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Description Input Data Default Related Program Profile 1 6 01 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Up to 16 Digits 0 9 None 15 01 04 20 08 13 ...

Page 395: ... 05 and 21 06 This program is compared to Station Restriction Class The higher class is applied Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 21 Toll Restriction for Trunks Seized Trunk Basis Setting Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Description Input Data Default Related Program 01 Restriction Class Enter the Toll Restriction Class for the sele...

Page 396: ...e Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 22 CO Message Waiting Indication Call Back Settings Level IN Input Data Trunk 001 400 Item No Description Input Data Default 01 CO MWI Call Back Enabling Enable Disable CO MWI Call Back 0 No VMWI Service 1 Enable VMWI Service 0 02 CO MWI Call Back Number Area Setting Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI Call Back 0000 9999 9999 ...

Page 397: ...m is used only when PRG14 01 38 is set to 2 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup 21 25 Expansion Calling Party Setup for Extension Level IN Input Data Extension 001 960 Item No Description Input Data Default 01 Expansion Calling Party Setup for Extension Related Programs 15 01 04 20 08 13 14 01 38 0 1 9 Max 16 characters None ...

Page 398: ...Issue 4 0 2 358 Program 21 Outgoing Call Setup ...

Page 399: ...unique ring cadence to indicate that the call has been ringing too long If disabled this does not occur 22 01 03 22 01 04 03 Ring No Answer Alarm Time 0 64800 sec 60 If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than this time the system changes the ring cadence This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long 22 01 02 04 DIL No Answer Recall Time 0 64800 sec 0 A DIL that rings i...

Page 400: ...ng Message 22 14 22 15 22 08 22 04 22 01 04 20 15 11 15 07 11 VRS Waiting Message Interval Time 0 64800 sec 20 Set up the sending duration time of the Auto Attendant Queuing The message is repeatedly sent out during the specified time 22 14 06 22 15 06 41 11 06 12 Mobile Extension Answer Time 0 Immediate Answer 1 64800 sec 3 Set up the system answering time when receiving an incoming call from tar...

Page 401: ... in 22 11 04 for each DID feature is not supported This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS When the trunk type is set to 3 DID the DID Intercept Destination feature for each DID is not supported This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned as VRS Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 02 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No...

Page 402: ...Issue 4 0 2 362 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering ...

Page 403: ...9 12 Tone Pattern 5 8 0 Select the ring tone range for the trunk The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension Eight ring tones are available 15 02 Table 2 8 Program 22 03 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation Pattern 1 High Middle Low 1100Hz 660Hz 520Hz 1400Hz 760Hz 660Hz 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz Pattern 2 ...

Page 404: ...00Hz 760Hz 660Hz 540Hz 540Hz 540Hz 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Pattern 7 High Middle Low 2000Hz 2000Hz 1100Hz 1100Hz 540Hz 760Hz 16Hz 16Hz 16Hz Pattern 8 High Middle Low 2000Hz 2000Hz 1100Hz 1100Hz 540Hz 760Hz 8Hz 8Hz 8Hz Table 2 8 Program 22 03 Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation ...

Page 405: ...ensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Ring Groups Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 04 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Level SA NOTE There are 100 available Ring Groups Input Data Incoming Ring Group Number 1 100 Input Data Incoming Ring Group Extension 1 48 de...

Page 406: ...Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 05 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Level IN NOTE There are 100 available Ring Groups Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Day Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default Description Related Program 01 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail 1 Assign Normal Ring Trunks 22 02 to Incoming Ring Groups 22 04 22...

Page 407: ...on should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Day Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default Related Program 01 1 8 0 No Ring 1 Ring 1 22 04 22 05 ...

Page 408: ...ne key If the extension does not have a line key the DIL rings CAP keys Use Program 22 02 to designate a trunk as a DIL You can make eight DIL assignments one for each Night Service mode Conditions Program 22 02 must be set to four for the trunk Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Line DIL Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 07 DIL Assignment Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No D...

Page 409: ...elayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group Make eight assignments one for each Night Service mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Line DIL Ring Group Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 08 DIL IRG No Answer Destination Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Day Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default 01 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming R...

Page 410: ...rvice If ISDN trunks we analyze the last digits that are set here If it is T 1 or analog DID it analyzes the first digits that are assigned here 1 8 4 02 Received Vacant Number Operation Enable Disable Vacant Number Intercept 0 Disconnect Cut 1 Transfer Refer to Program 22 12 DID Intercept Ring Group on page 2 378 0 03 Sub Addressing Mode 0 Extension Specify Intercom 1 DID Conversion Table 0 04 DI...

Page 411: ...Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing DID 08 T302 Time out Operation Only Overlap Receiving Mode 0 Disconnect Cut 1 Transfer Refer to Program 22 12 DID Intercept Ring Group on page 2 378 0 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 412: ... Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 10 DID Translation Table Setup Level IN Input Data Conversion Table Area Number 01 20 Item No Item Input Data 01 1st Area Setup Start Address 0 4000 0 No Setting 1st Area Setup End Address Default Table 2nd Area Setup Start Address Default Table 2nd Area Setup End Address Default Table Conversion Table Area 1st 2nd Start Table End Table Start Table End Table 1 1 ...

Page 413: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 373 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing DID ...

Page 414: ...rst character twice for the second character etc For example to enter a C press 2 three times Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 11 DID Translation Number Conversion Level SA NOTE If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination Program 22 10 Table 2 9 Keys for Entering Names Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedu...

Page 415: ...e Number 1 4000 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Received Number This is the received DID digits Maximum eight digits No Setting 02 Target Number Enter the destination number to which the DID number is sent Maximum 24 digits No Setting 03 DID Name Enter the name to be displayed on an inbound DID call On a call that is transferred or forwarded this name will not appear until the call has been ans...

Page 416: ...s this setting 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 0 08 Maximum Number of DID Calls 0 400 0 No Limit 0 09 Music on Hold Source 0 IC MOH Port 1 BGM Port 2 ACI Port 0 10 ACI Music Source Port When a sound source type is 2 in above 0 96 0 11 Ring Group Transfer Enable Disable each conversation table ability to follow the Ring Group programming defined in Program 22 12 01 DID Intercept Ring Group If Program 22 ...

Page 417: ... Conditions When the trunk type is set to 3 DID in 22 02 01 the DID Transfer Destination for each DID feature is not supported This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing DID ...

Page 418: ...ined in Program 22 11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 12 DID Intercept Ring Group Level IN NOTE If Programs 22 11 05 and 22 11 06 are set the priority of transferring is in this order Program 22 11 05 Program 22 11 06 Program 22 12 For busy and no answer calls if the first and third destinations are programmed but the second destination is not the inc...

Page 419: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 379 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing DID ...

Page 420: ...ore than one type of DID trunk put each type in a separate Trunk Group For each Trunk Group you make a Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward Dialing DID Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 13 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Level IN Input Data Trunk Group Number 1 100 Item No Day Night Mode Conversion Table Area Numb...

Page 421: ... 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 03 1st Delayed Message Sending Count This is the number of times the 1st Delay Message is played If set to 0 the 1st Delay Message is not played 0 255 time 0 04 2nd Delayed Message Number VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 05 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count This is the number of times the 2nd Delay M...

Page 422: ...Issue 4 0 2 382 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 423: ...used for the 1st Delayed Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 03 1st Delayed Message Sending Count This is the number of times the 1st Delay Message is played If set to 0 the 1st Delay Message is not played 0 255 time 0 04 2nd Delayed Message Number VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 05 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count This is the...

Page 424: ...Issue 4 0 2 384 Program 22 Incoming Call Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Group ...

Page 425: ...Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial group number for Private Call Refuse Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Department Group Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 16 Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Speed Dial Group Number 0 64 0 ...

Page 426: ...nce None Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 17 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Level IN Input Data Conversion Table Number 01 500 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Received Dial Up to 8 digits No Setting 02 Start of Time 0000 2359 Time 0000 03 End of Time 0000 2359 Time 0000 04 Dial In Conversion Table Number 0 4000 0 05 Day of the Week 0 Off 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wedn...

Page 427: ... None Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 18 Private Call Assignment Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Transfer Mode 0 Not defined 1 Internal dial 2 Incoming Ring Group 0 02 Destination Number 1 Internal Dial up to 24 digits 0 9 P R 2 Incoming Ring Group 0 100 No Setting 03 Incoming Ring Pattern 0 13 0 Normal pattern 1 4 Tone pattern 1 4 5 9 Scale pattern 10 13 Tone Patter...

Page 428: ...o set flexible ringing by Caller ID per timer pattern mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 22 Incoming Call Setup 22 20 Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 01 400 Day Night Mode 01 08 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Flexible Ringing 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 ...

Page 429: ...tercepts the highest priority extension first Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Group Call Pickup Program 23 Answer Features Setup 23 02 Call Pickup Groups Level IN NOTE There are 64 available Call Pickup Groups Input Data Extension Number 1 960 Item No Group Number Priority Default Description Related Program 01 1 64 1 9999 1 xxx Assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups other than the extens...

Page 430: ...Routing programming defined in Program 14 06 The extension user ringing calls however always have priority over calls ringing other co worker extensions Refer to the Line Preference feature in the UNIVERGE SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual for more information Program 23 Answer Features Setup 23 03 Universal Answer Auto Answer Level IN NOTE Make one entry for each Night Service mode Input ...

Page 431: ...Issue 1 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 391 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Line Preference Night Service ...

Page 432: ...tures Setup 23 04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions Level IN NOTE There are 512 available Virtual Extension Ports Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Order Extension Group Number Defaul t Description Related Program 01 1 4 00 64 0 or 00 Don t Care 00 When an extension has a virtual extension assigned to a Programmable Function Key this program determines the priority for autom...

Page 433: ...me or Park Hold Time After this time the system invokes the Hold recall time again Cycling between time 01 and 02 and 06 and 07 continues until a user answers the call 0 64800 sec 30 03 Exclusive Hold Recall Time A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time 0 64800 sec 90 04 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extensio...

Page 434: ...ns None Feature Cross Reference Hold Park 07 Park Hold Time Extended Recall A call left parked longer than this time recalls the extension that initially parked it 0 64800 sec 300 20 11 19 Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program ...

Page 435: ...their call rings the destination extension If set to 1 a transferred caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension 0 Hold Tone 1 Ring Back Tone 0 20 03 02 03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time If activated at an extension Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this time This also sets the time a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the c...

Page 436: ... 02 20 28 03 24 02 10 08 Delayed Transfer Time for all Department Groups 0 64800 sec 10 11 11 28 11 11 29 15 07 59 09 Two B Channel Transfer Retry Timer 0 64800 sec 10 10 03 16 PRI 10 Disconnect Trunk to Trunk 0 64800 sec 0 14 01 25 20 28 01 20 28 02 20 28 03 24 02 07 11 No Answer Step Transfer 0 64800 sec 10 14 01 26 12 No Answer Trunk to Trunk Transfer 0 64800 sec 0 14 01 26 13 Hook Flash Sendin...

Page 437: ...ser can pick up only a call parked in orbit by an extension user in their own group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Park Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 03 Park Group Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Park Group Number Default Description Related Program 01 1 64 1 Assign an extension to a Park Group The system allows a total of 64 Park Groups 15 07 01 ...

Page 438: ...ature Cross Reference Call Forwarding Off Premise Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 04 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Target Setup Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Day Night Mode Speed Dial Area Number Default Description Related Program 01 1 8 0 9999 9999 The destination telephone number of the Trunk to Trunk Transfer uses the number registered into the Speed Dial Use this...

Page 439: ...am 24 Hold Transfer Setup 24 05 Department Group Transfer Target Setup Level IN NOTE There are 64 available Department Groups Input Data Extension Group Number 01 64 Item No Day Night Mode Speed Dial Area Number Default Description Related Program 01 1 8 0 9999 9999 Use the Speed Dialing area to program the destination number of the transferred telephone number when a Department Group call is tran...

Page 440: ...nks can be assigned by pressing Line Key 1 Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Input Data Default 01 Call Forwarding Type 0 Call Forwarding Off 1 Call Forwarding with both ring 2 Call Forwarding when no answer 3 Call Forwarding all calls 4 Call Forwarding busy or no answer 5 Call Forwarding when busy 0 02 CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring All Call No Answer 0 9 R and P Up to 24 ...

Page 441: ...eature Cross Reference Call Forwarding Off Premise 06 Call Forwarding Destination for CTX PBX for All Call No Answer 0 9 R and P Up to 24 digits None 07 Call Forwarding Destination for CTX PBX for Busy 0 9 R and P Up to 24 digits None Item No Input Data Default ...

Page 442: ...Issue 4 0 2 402 Program 24 Hold Transfer Setup ...

Page 443: ...SA Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 01 VRS DISA Line Basic Data Setup Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 VRS DISA Dial In Mode 0 Extension Number Service Code Specify Intercom 1 Use Dial Conversion Table 0 22 11 02 DISA User ID 0 Off 1 On 1 25 08 03 VRS DISA Transfer Alarm 0 Normal Off 1 Alarm On 0 04 VRS DISA Transfer Tone 0 Ring Back Tone...

Page 444: ...ssigned as a VRS DISA Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 02 DID DISA VRS Message Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Day Night Mode Message Talkie Source Additional Data Default 01 1 8 0 No Message 1 VRS 2 ACI 3 Department Group 1 01 100 VRS Message Number 2 01 04 ACI Group Number 3 01 64 Extension Group Number 0 ...

Page 445: ...tion a ring group or voice mail When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode make an entry for each Night Service mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 03 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Day Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default Related Program 01 1 8 0 ...

Page 446: ... destination a ring group or voice mail When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode make an entry for each Night Service mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 04 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer Busy Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Day Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default Related Program 01 1...

Page 447: ...outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly If you enter 0 i e no error message the call reroutes according to Program 25 03 and 25 04 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 05 VRS DISA Error Message Assignment Level IN NOTE For each trunk make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No ...

Page 448: ...n extension a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master number A one digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message Example Message Number 01 Destination 2 Next Message Number 0 Dial 399 In this example when 2 is dialed by an outside caller the system transfers the call to 399 This means that extension 200 299 cannot receive calls from VRS DISA users during after VR...

Page 449: ...ns Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same first digit is defined here Only one key dialing is supported for extension dialing Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Voice Response System VRS ...

Page 450: ...tem sets the call as a Ring No Answer After this time expires the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing set in Program 25 03 and 25 04 0 64800 sec 0 25 04 03 Disconnect after VRS DISA retransfer to IRG From DISA trunk when the call may go to Incoming Ring Group of PRG25 03 25 04 This setting determines the time the call is ringing in the IRG 0 64800 sec 60 04 Calling Time to Automatic...

Page 451: ... by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this time the system terminates the DISA call 0 64800 sec 30 10 DISA External Paging Time Enter the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this time the system terminates the DISA call 0 64800 sec 30 11 VRS DISA Answer Delay Time Set up the time the system waits after receiving an incoming VRS...

Page 452: ...word for each user There are 15 users each with one 6 digit password Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 08 DISA User ID Setup Level SA Input Data DISA User Number 1 15 Item No Password Default Related PRG 01 Dial Fixed six digits 0 9 No Setting 49 10 11 ...

Page 453: ...ce with the call Assign the DISA Class of Service options in Program 20 14 When programming DISA Class of Service make one entry for each Night Service mode Conditions DISA Class of Service cannot be 0 Program 20 06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 09 Class of Service for DISA Users Level ...

Page 454: ...9 in Program 20 14 02 Assign a route to each DISA Class of Service 1 15 The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA caller dials When programming make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 10 Trunk Group Routing for DISA Level IN Input Data DISA User ...

Page 455: ...lass assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service and user which is determined by the password the caller dials When programming make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Conditions Program 21 05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 11 DISA Toll Restriction Class Level...

Page 456: ...als When programming make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode Use Program 11 09 02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code Use Program 14 06 to set trunk routes Conditions You cannot use Program 21 15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Trunk Group Routing Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 12 Alternate Trunk Group Routing for...

Page 457: ...is used to define additional DISA call options Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Voice Response System VRS Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 13 System Option for DISA Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 VRS Message Access Password Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system allows them to record listen to and or erase the VRS mes...

Page 458: ...nditions Related to Program 25 03 01 and Program 25 04 01 Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Voice Response System VRS Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 15 VRS DISA Transfer Target Setup Level IN Input Data Trunk No 001 400 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 VRS DISA Transfer Target Area At Wrong Dial Speed Dial bin number 0 9999 9999 02 VRS DISA Transfer Target Area At...

Page 459: ...Single Digit Timer Assign a timer per single digit table required to expire before the allocated single digit entry is applied Related PRG25 06 02 0 68400 0 02 DTMF Detect Select whether or not system detects DTMF during VRS message 1 On setting detects DTMF signal during sending VRS message for VRS DISA call 0 Off setting does not detect DTMF signal during sending VRS message for VRS DISA call Re...

Page 460: ...Issue 4 0 2 420 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Voice Response System VRS ...

Page 461: ... 25 17 VRS DISA Attendant Message Service Setup Level IN Input Data Attendant Message Number 001 100 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Programs 01 Transfer Ring Group at Wrong Dialing 0 Disconnect 1 100 Incoming Ring Group 102 In skin External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail 104 Speed Dial Bin 0 22 04 25 03 02 Transfer Ring Group at No Answer Busy 0 Disconnect 1 100 Incoming Ring Group 102 In sk...

Page 462: ...Issue 4 0 2 422 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Voice Response System VRS Direct Inward Dial DID ...

Page 463: ...nd default setting Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Inward System Access DISA Voice Response System VRS Direct Inward Dial DID Program 25 VRS DISA Setup 25 18 VRS DISA Attendant Message Timer Setup Level IN Input Data Attendant Message Number 001 100 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Programs 01 Dial Tone 0 68400 10 22 04 25 03 02 No Answer Time 0 68400 0 22 04 25 04 03 Disconn...

Page 464: ...Issue 4 0 2 424 Program 25 VRS DISA Setup ...

Page 465: ... If ARS is enabled at Site B this time can be programmed for 5 500ms at Site A If ARS is disabled and Site B is using F Route for outbound dialing this time should be programmed for 30 three seconds at Site A 0 64800 sec in 0 1 second increments 30 20 03 04 03 ARS Misdialed Number Handling If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS this option determines if the system should route over Trunk G...

Page 466: ...Issue 4 0 2 426 Program 26 ARS Service Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ...

Page 467: ...Related Programming 01 Dial Dial Digits 16 digits maximum 1 9 0 or for wild character Press line key 1 No Setting 02 ARS Service Type 0 No Service None 1 Route to Trunk Group 2 Select F Route Access 0 03 Additional Data Service Number If Service Type 1 in 26 02 Select Trunk Group Number 0 100 101 150 100 Networking ID 0 No Route If Service Type 2 in 26 02 F Route Time Schedule Not Used 0 500 F Rou...

Page 468: ...gram 26 ARS Service Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection 06 LCR Carrier Table Entry 0 25 0 07 Network Specified Parameter Table 0 16 0 26 12 Item No Item Input Data Default Related Programming ...

Page 469: ... function is valid only for outbound calls by ISDN trunks DNN Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows For example D041234 outdials 1234 Valid entries are 0 9 Wnn wait nn seconds and P pause Each digits code counts as a digit So for example if a P was added for a pause the entry would look like D05P1234 Wnn Wait nn seconds P Pause in analog trunk R Redial the initially dial...

Page 470: ... Program 26 ARS Service Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection Input Data Dial Treatment Table Number 1 15 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Treatment Code 24 characters maximum No Setting ...

Page 471: ...for an extension Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route extension calls Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection Program 26 ARS Service 26 04 ARS Class of Service Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Day Night Mode Class Default 01 1 8 0 50 0 ...

Page 472: ...Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 26 ARS Service 26 05 LCR Carrier Table Level IN Input Data Carrier Table Number 1 25 Item No Name Input Data Default 01 Delete Digits 0 16 0 02 Access Code Up to 16 digits 0 9 Pause No Setting 03 Authorization Table Number 0 10 0 04 Cost Center Code 0 Not Used 1 Used 0 ...

Page 473: ...tion Code Table to set the Authorization Code Table for LCR Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 26 ARS Service 26 06 LCR Authorization Code Table Level IN Input Data Authorization Table Number 1 10 Item No Name Input Data Default 01 Input Dial Up to 10 digits No Setting ...

Page 474: ... Code Table to set the Cost Center Code for LCR Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 26 ARS Service 26 07 LCR Cost Center Code Table Level IN Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item No Name Input Data Default 01 Input Dial Up to eight digits Extension Number ...

Page 475: ...Override Access Code for LCR Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 26 ARS Service 26 08 LCR Manual Override Access Code Table Level IN Input Data Manual Override Access Code Table Number 1 10 Item No Name Input Data Default 01 Manual Override Access Code Up to four digits No Setting 02 Carrier Table Number 0 25 0 ...

Page 476: ...the Manual Override Exemption for LCR Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 26 ARS Service 26 09 LCR Manual Override Exemption Table Level IN Input Data Manual Override Exemption Table Number 1 25 Item No Name Input Data Default 01 Carrier Code Manual Override Exemption Up to four digits No Setting ...

Page 477: ...k ID for Alternate carrier access which is referred from Program 26 03 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 26 ARS Service 26 11 Transit Network ID Table Level IN Input Data Transit Network ID Table 1 4 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Transit Network ID Carrier ID 0000 9999 Fixed four digits No setting ...

Page 478: ...ter Table 1 16 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Type of Number Selection This setting is used by Program 26 02 07 and Program 44 05 11 to determine ISDN element 0 System Default 1 Unknown 2 International No 3 National No 4 Network Specific No 5 Subscriber No 6 Abbreviated No 0 02 Numbering Plan Identification Selection This setting is used by Program 26 02 07 and Program 44 05 11 to determine IS...

Page 479: ...nk Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route an extension s calls Conditions Only when NetLink is enabled Feature Cross Reference None Program 26 ARS Service 26 13 ARS Class of Service for NetLink DT700 Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Input Data NetLink System ID 1 50 Item No Day Night Mode Class Default 01 1 8 0 50 0 ...

Page 480: ...Issue 4 0 2 440 Program 26 ARS Service ...

Page 481: ...onsoles The available options are Regular Business Mode 0 Hotel Mode 1 Monitor Mode 2 Business Mode 3 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Station Selection DSS Console Hotel Motel Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 01 DSS Console Operating Mode Level IN Input Data DSS Console Number 01 32 Item No DSS Operation Mode Default 01 0 Business Mode 1 Hotel Mode 2 Monitor Mode 3 Business Mode ...

Page 482: ... Console s combination is called a Console Number There are 32 Console Numbers 1 32 Console Numbers can be assigned to extensions When entering data the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally made first Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Station Selection DSS Console Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 02 DSS Console Extension Assignment Level IN Input Data 60 button DSS Console N...

Page 483: ...re proceeding Without clearing an extension key first the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp display although the DSS function works correctly If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected either by phone or using the WebPro or PC Programming you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back in to reset the console lamping Input Data Program 30 DSS...

Page 484: ... Night Mode Switch Mode Number 1 8 Red On On mode 10 Call Forward Immediate Slow Blink Red Forwarding State Rapid Blink Red Forwarded State 11 Call Forward Busy Slow Blink Red Forwarding State Rapid Blink Red Forwarded State 12 Call Forward No Answer Slow Blink Red Forwarding State Rapid Blink Red Forwarded State 13 Call Forward Busy No Answer Slow Blink Red Forwarding State Rapid Blink Red Forwar...

Page 485: ...data or Extension No not Virtual Extension or In case of refer to the Extension No not Virtual Extension set in 24 09 03 None 35 Camp On Red On Under Camp On or Reservation 36 Department Step Call None 37 DND FWD Override Call None 38 Message Waiting None 39 Room Monitoring Rapid Blink Red Under Monitored Slow Blink Red Under Monitoring With Room Monitor there are two parties in the monitor one be...

Page 486: ...Red On Under Setting 53 Automatic Answer with Delay Message Starting Red On Active 54 External Call Forward by Door Box Red On Active 55 Extension Name Edit None 56 General Purpose LED Operation 001 100 Red 001 100 Rapid Blink Red 101 200 Rapid Blink Green 201 300 Red On Green Rapid Blink 57 General Purpose LED Indication 001 100 Rapid Blink Red 101 200 Rapid Blink Green 201 300 Red On Green Rapid...

Page 487: ...k Green New Message 78 Conversation Recording 0 Conversation recording 1 Delete Re recording 2 Delete Rapid Blink Red Recording 79 Automated Attendant In Skin Extension Number or Pilot Number Red On Set Up for All Calls Slow Blink Red Set Up for Busy No Answer Calls 80 Tandem Ringing 0 Cancel 1 Set Extension Number to Tandem Ring Red On Active 81 Automatic Transfer to Transfer Key Trunk Line Numbe...

Page 488: ...ox Access Key Door Box number 1 8 99 Alternate Answer Key 04 Change Restriction Class One time Toll Restriction 06 Power Save for Power Save Group 07 Fixed Operation Mode Night Mode Service Group No 01 32 Fast flash Red Setup 11 Major Alarm Red On A major alarm has occurred 12 Minor Alarm Red On A minor alarm has occurred 13 Calling Party Number Notification Any number up to 24 digits Red On Set O...

Page 489: ...Number List 2 Appearance Function Level 00 99 Service Code 752 Function Number Function Additional Data LED Indication 00 Not Used 01 Trunk Key Trunk Number 001 400 02 Not Used 03 Not Used 04 Park Key Park Number 01 64 05 Not Used 06 Trunk Access Via Networking Network System Number 01 50 07 Station Park Hold None 08 Not Used 10 Not Used 11 Not Used 12 Not Used 13 Not Used 14 Not Used 15 Not Used ...

Page 490: ...essing the ALT key on the DSS console Conditions Related extension is assigned in PRG30 02 Alternate answer key ALT key is assigned at PRG30 03 Feature Cross Reference None Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 04 DSS Console Alternate Answer Level SA Index 1 DSS Console Number 01 32 Item No Item Name Input Data Default 01 DSS Console Alternate Answer Alternate DSS No 01 32 0 No Setting ...

Page 491: ... Agent Log Out DSS 0 7 5 IL 07 Agent Log In DSS 0 7 4 IR 08 Agent Emergency DSS 0 7 6 IW 09 Hotel Status Code 1 Hotel DSS 0 7 7 On 10 Hotel Status Code 2 Hotel DSS 0 7 1 FL 11 Hotel Status Code 3 Hotel DSS 0 7 2 WK 12 Hotel Status Code 4 Hotel DSS 0 7 3 RW 13 Hotel Status Code 5 Hotel DSS 0 7 5 IL 14 Hotel Status Code 6 Hotel DSS 0 7 3 RW 15 Hotel Status Code 7 Hotel DSS 0 7 6 IW 16 Hotel Status C...

Page 492: ...Issue 4 0 2 452 Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 21 VM Message Indication 0 7 3 RW Table 2 10 ED Patterns for DSS Console Input Data Continued Item No Item Lamp Pattern Data Default ...

Page 493: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 453 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Station Selection DSS Console ...

Page 494: ... the console can be associated to the attendant phone The system supports up to 32 IP DSS Consoles Conditions This is a Read Only command Feature Cross Reference None Program 30 DSS DLS Console Setup 30 10 DSS Console IP Terminal Setup Level SA Input Data DSS Console Number 01 32 Item No Function Name Input Data Default 01 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 ...

Page 495: ... 2 six times to display the lower case letter Program 31 Paging Setup 31 01 System Options for Internal External Paging Level IN Table 2 11 Keys for Entering Names Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below refer to this chart Names can have up to 12 digits Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter c...

Page 496: ...01 All Call Paging Zone Name Assign a name to each All Call Internal Paging zone The name shows on the display of the telephone making the announcement Up to 12 Characters Group All 11 12 19 31 02 02 02 Page Announcement Duration Set the maximum time for Page announcements Affects External Paging only 0 64800 sec 1200 04 Privacy Release Time Once the user initiates a Meet Me Conference or Voice Ca...

Page 497: ...t Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Internal Paging Group Number Assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups i e Page Zones The system allows up to 64 Internal Paging Groups An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group 0 64 0 No Setting 0 for IP Station 1 for TDM Station 02 Internal All Call Paging Receiving Allow Prevent All Call Internal Paging for each ex...

Page 498: ...press 2 three times Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter Program 31 Paging Setup 31 03 Internal Paging Group Settings Level IN Table 2 12 Keys for Entering Names Key for Entering Names When entering names in the procedures below refer to this chart Names can have up to 12 digits Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 Enter characters A C a c...

Page 499: ...int of the flashing cursor and to the right Input Data Internal Paging Group Number 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Internal Paging Group Name Assign name to Internal Paging Groups i e Page Zones The system shows the name you program on the telephone display Up to 12 Characters Refer to default table Extension Paging Group Name 01 Group 1 02 Group 2 64 Group 64 Table 2 12 Keys for Enterin...

Page 500: ...Issue 4 0 2 460 Program 31 Paging Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging Internal ...

Page 501: ... always make the External Paging Zone Group the same number as the External Paging zone i e 1 1 2 2 etc Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging External Program 31 Paging Setup 31 04 External Paging Zone Group Level IN Input Data External Speaker Number 1 9 Item No Paging Group Number Default 01 0 8 0 No Setting Speaker 1 PGD 2 U10 ADP 1 Group 1 Speaker 2 PGD 2 U10 ADP 2 Group 2 Speaker 3 P...

Page 502: ...When programming the zones on the PGD 2 U10 ADP are numbers 1 8 The GCD CP10 zone is number 9 For UNA ringing make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Night Services Paging External Program 31 Paging Setup 31 05 Universal Night Answer Ring Over Page Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 1 400 External Speaker Number 1 9 Item No Day Night Mode Input ...

Page 503: ...tone before the External Paging announcement 0 No Tone None 1 Splash Tone 2 Chime Tone 2 02 Broadcast Splash Tone After Paging Paging End Time Enable Disable splash tone after Paging over an external zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an External Paging announcement 0 No Tone None 1 Splash Tone 2 Chime Tone 2 03 Speech Path Determine if the external speaker is used f...

Page 504: ...Issue 4 0 2 464 Program 31 Paging Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging External ...

Page 505: ...ey simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone Use Program 31 04 01 to assign an External Paging Zone 1 9 to an External Page Group 1 8 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Paging External Paging Internal Program 31 Paging Setup 31 07 Combined Paging Assignments Level IN Input Data External Paging Group Number 0 8 0 All External Paging Item No Internal Paging Group Number ...

Page 506: ...n programming the zones on the PGD 2 U10 ADP are numbers 1 8 The GCD CP10 zone is number 9 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Background Music Paging External Program 31 Paging Setup 31 08 BGM on External Paging Level IN Input Data External Speaker Number 1 9 Item No Item Item Input Data Default 01 BGM Enable Disable the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting Background Music when ...

Page 507: ...ata Default 01 Door Box Answer Time A multiline terminal user must answer Door Box chimes during this time 0 64800 sec 30 02 Door Lock Cancel Time When a single line 2500 type telephone user hook flashes or a multiline terminal user presses the Recall key while talking to a Door Box the strike stays open for this time 0 64800 sec 10 03 Off Premise Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect Timer Define t...

Page 508: ...all button Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Door Box Program 32 Door Box and Sensor Setup 32 02 Door Box Ring Assignment Level SA NOTE The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal Input Data Door Box Number 1 8 Day Night Mode 1 8 Item No Door Box Ring Group Number Extension Number Default 01 01 32 Maximum eight digits No Setting ...

Page 509: ... Setup Level IN NOTE The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal Input Data Door Box Number 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Chime Pattern 0 None 1 Door Box Ring 1 2 Door Box Ring 2 3 Door Box Ring 3 4 Door Box Ring 4 5 Door Box Ring 5 6 Door Box Ring 6 Door Box 1 1 Door Box 2 2 Door Box 3 3 Door Box 4 4 Door Box 5 5 Door Box 6 6 Door ...

Page 510: ... 32 04 Door Box Name Setup Level IN NOTE The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal Input Data Door Box Number 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Door Box Name Up to 12 characters Door Box Name 1 DOOR 1 Door Box Name 2 DOOR 2 Door Box Name 3 DOOR 3 Door Box Name 4 DOOR 4 Door Box Name 5 DOOR 5 Door Box Name 6 DOOR 6 Door Box Name 7 DOOR...

Page 511: ...munications Interface Each ACI software port can have only one function input output or none Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface ACI Program 33 CTA and ACI Setup 33 01 ACI Port Type Setup Level IN Input Data ACI Port Number 01 96 Item No ACI Type Default 01 0 None 1 MOH BGM Input 2 External Audio Port Input Output 2 ...

Page 512: ...roup it connects to the ACI port in order of its priority A higher priority port e g 1 receives calls before a lower priority port e g 6 There are 96 ACI ports and 16 ACI Department Groups available Default Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Analog Communications Interface ACI Program 33 CTA and ACI Setup 33 02 ACI Department Calling Group Level IN Input Data ACI Port Number 01 96 Item No Gro...

Page 513: ...mediate start or wink start signaling 22 02 02 Receive Dial Type for E M Tie Line 0 DP 1 DTMF 2 MF 1 10 09 03 E M Dial In Mode 0 Specify Extension Number Intercom 1 Use Conversion Table NTT 0 Determine if the incoming Tie Line call should be directed as an intercom call or if it should follow the DID Translation Table in Program 22 11 22 11 04 E M Line Dial Tone 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 Enter 1...

Page 514: ...Issue 4 0 2 474 Program 34 Tie Line Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines ...

Page 515: ...rvice options are defined in Program 20 14 For each Tie line make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Conditions Program 20 06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 02 E M Tie Line Class of Service Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 1 400 Item No Day Night Mode Class Default Related Program 01 1 8 1 15 1 20...

Page 516: ...nk Group Routing in Program 14 07 If the system has Automatic Route Selection dialing 9 accesses ARS Make a separate entry for each Tie Line for each Night Service Mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 03 Trunk Group Routing for E M Tie Lines Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Day Night Mode Route Table Number Default 01 1 8 0 100 0 ...

Page 517: ...5 and 21 06 For each Tie Line you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode Conditions Program 20 06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 04 E M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 001 400 Item No Day Night Mode Toll Restriction Class Default Related Pro...

Page 518: ...bound trunk e g dialed from a Tie Line For each inbound trunk group enable or disable access to each CO trunk group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 05 Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction Level IN Input Data Incoming Trunk Group Number 001 100 Outgoing Trunk Group Number Input Data Default 1 100 0 Enable Y Tandem 1 Disable N Tandem 0 ...

Page 519: ...s do not want to receive an incoming call they could delete all digits including the extension number Add Digit If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location the digits for the location can be added to the received digits Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 06 Add Delete Digit for E M Tie Line Level IN Input Data Incom...

Page 520: ... the station that performed the transfer when not answered Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 07 E M Tie Line Timer Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 First Digit Pause E M Immediate Start 0 64800 3 02 First Digit Pause E M Wink Start 0 64800 0 03 First Digit Pause LD Trunk 0 64800 3 04 LD Trunk Guard Time 0 64800 0 05 Trunk Answer Detect Timer for E...

Page 521: ...e Lines This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll Restriction is enabled in Program 21 05 13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Tie Lines Program 34 Tie Line Setup 34 08 Toll Restriction Data for E M Tie Lines Level IN Input Data Class of Service 01 15 Item No Table No Dial Data Default Related Program 01 01 20 Up to 10 Digits 0 9 No Setting 21 05 13 ...

Page 522: ... Telco provides The character indicates a delimiter If PRG34 01 02 is selected to 2 MF this PRG works only as 4 ANI DNIS 0 Address 1 ANI 2 DNIS 3 ANI Address 4 ANI DNIS 5 DNIS ANI Delimiter Code 0 34 01 02 34 09 02 02 Delimiter Dial Code Define the character Telco uses as a delimiter see entries 1 5 in Item 1 above Valid entries are 0 9 and 1 9 0 34 09 01 03 Route Setup of Receive Dial Specify the...

Page 523: ... or not ANI data should appear on telephone displays as part of Caller ID display 0 Display Off 1 Display On 1 13 04 20 09 02 22 11 03 23 09 04 06 Routing SPD Table Setup Define which part of the SPD Table set up in Program 13 04 the system uses for ANI DNIS Caller ID look ups and ANI DNIS routing This is required if Items 04 and 05 above are 1 Caller ID on When you specify a starting and end addr...

Page 524: ...the system handles an ANI DNIS call if destination is busy or does not answer 0 Play Busy or Ringback Tone to Caller Busy NoAns 1 Route Caller to Ring Group Specified in Program 25 04 Transfer 0 25 04 09 Calling Number Address Length When Item 01 0 ANI DNIS receive format is the address Specify the address length 1 8 digits 7 34 09 01 Item No Name Input Data Default Related Program COS 2 15 ...

Page 525: ...e Line Setup 34 10 Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment Level IN Input Data Incoming Trunk Group No 001 100 Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Delete Digits for T1 ANI Define the number of digits to delete from the information element received from Telco 0 9 digits 2 Assign the number of information digits to delete from the element received from the Network Example of ANI information K...

Page 526: ...Issue 4 0 2 486 Program 34 Tie Line Setup ...

Page 527: ...e in which the SMDR header should be printed 0 English 1 German 2 French 3 Italian 4 Spanish 0 04 Omit Digits The number of digits entered in this option do not print on the SMDR report For example if the entry is 10 the last 10 digits a user dials do not appear on the SMDR report 0 24 0 Not applied 0 05 Minimum Digits Outgoing calls must be at least this number of digits for inclusion in the SMDR...

Page 528: ...88 Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Station Message Detail Recording 08 Format Selection 0 NA Type North America 1 G J Type Overseas Japan 0 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 529: ...Select whether the system should display the trunk number or the name on SMDR reports If this option is set to 1 Program 35 02 14 must be set to 0 0 Name 1 Number 1 04 Summary Daily Set to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a daily summary at midnight every night 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 05 Summary Weekly Set to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a weekly summary every Saturday at midnight 0 No...

Page 530: ... displayed in Program 35 02 03 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 0 15 CLI DID Number Switching Determine if the CLI or DID Number Switching should be displayed 0 CLI CLIP 1 DID Calling Number 2 CID Name 0 16 Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number Determine how the SMDR should print incoming calls on ANI DNIS or DID trunks If set to 1 ANI DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits If set to 0 trunk names are printe...

Page 531: ... Manual 2 491 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Station Message Detail Recording 24 Mark Virtual Loop Define whether calls routed via the ISDN Virtual Loopback are tagged 0 Don t mark 1 Mark 0 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 532: ...t Codes Required but not verified No verify 3 Account Codes Required and Verified Verify 0 02 Forced Account Code Toll Call Setup Enable Account Codes for all calls or just toll calls for mode 2 or 3 in Item 01 above 0 Account Codes for toll and local calls All 1 Account Codes just for toll calls STD 0 03 Account Codes for Incoming Calls Allow users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls If dis...

Page 533: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 493 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Account Codes ...

Page 534: ...he characters 0 9 or Use the LK1 to enter a wild card For example the entry 234 means the user can enter 0234 9234 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Account Codes Forced Verified Unverified Program 35 SMDR Account Code Setup 35 06 Verified Account Code Table Level IN Input Data Verified Account Code Bin Number 1 2000 Item No Verified Account Code Default 01 1 9 0 Wild card Up to 16 digits No...

Page 535: ... Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS 01 US English 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin American Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 ...

Page 536: ...Issue 4 0 2 496 Program 40 Voice Recording System Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Integration Analog ...

Page 537: ...wer Destination Assign the transferred Ring Group when the VRS is unanswered after Call Forwarding with Personal Greeting Message 0 100 Incoming Ring Group Number 0 No Setting 04 VRS No Answer Time If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all VRS ports are busy a DIL or DISA call to the extension waits this time for a VRS port to become free 0 64800 sec 0 05 Park and Page Repeat Timer VRS...

Page 538: ...t go through 0 101 0 No message 101 Fixed message 0 08 Call Attendant Busy Message 0 100 0 No message 0 09 Call Attendant No Answer Message 0 100 0 No message 0 10 Call Forward Remainder Announcement Flag that controls the VRS playback announcement for on the forwarded phone 0 Do not play 1 Play 1 11 Call Forward Notification Announcement Flag that controls the VRS playback announcement for toward...

Page 539: ... each trunk When the extension user answers the incoming call the assigned VRS message is sent to the outside caller Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Response System VRS Program 40 Voice Recording System 40 11 Preamble Message Assignment Level IN Input Data Trunk Port Number 1 400 Item No Day Night Mode VRS Message Number Default 01 1 8 0 100 0 No Service 0 ...

Page 540: ...Issue 4 0 2 500 Program 40 Voice Recording System ...

Page 541: ...ut Data Default 01 System Supervisory Extension Up to eight digits 0 9 No Setting 02 Login ID Code Digit 0 20 0 No Login ID 0 03 MIS Connection Ports 0 None 3 LAN GCD CP10 0 04 MIS Notification when Call receives Busy 0 Notifies 1 No notification 0 05 MIS Output Format Select incoming DDI format which is used in MIS output P events 0 Classic 1 8 digit DDI Field 2 Extra DDI Event 3 XML Format 0 06 ...

Page 542: ...Issue 1 0 2 502 Program 41 ACD Setup ...

Page 543: ...s The trunk belonging to an group receives an incoming call while an agent is logged in An extension transfers a call to an group using the group pilot number An incoming call is received with a DID DISA number which is assigned as an pilot number Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 02 Group and Agent Assignments Level SA Input Data Extension Number 001 9...

Page 544: ...up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks Use Program 41 07 to assign the Work Schedules to the days of the week Program 41 ACD Setup 41 03 Incoming Ring Group Assignment for Group Level SA Input Data Incoming Ring Group Number 1 100 Work Period Mode Number 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Group Number 0 64 0 No setting 0 02 Night Announcement Service 0 No 1 Yes 0 03 Priority Data De...

Page 545: ...Issue 1 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 505 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Ring Groups ...

Page 546: ...ervisor In addition an extension can be a supervisor for only one Group Conditions If you assign an extension as a Group Supervisor in this program you cannot program the same extension as a System Supervisor in Program 41 01 01 Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 04 Group Supervisor Level SA Input Data Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Group Supervisor E...

Page 547: ...sed by the Trunk Work Schedules Extensions can log in only during their work period Extensions receive the following calls when they are logged in Call on a Trunk When the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time Program 41 03 and 41 06 Pilot Number Call Any time if extensions are available Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 05 Agent Work Sc...

Page 548: ...rk Periods After you set up the schedules assign them to days of the week in Program 41 07 This is the same program used by the Agent Work Schedules Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 06 Trunk Work Schedules Level SA Input Data Work Schedule Time Pattern Number 1 4 Item No Work Period Mode Number Start Time End Time Default 01 1 8 0000 2359 0000 2359 Sta...

Page 549: ... both the Agent Work Schedules Program 41 05 and the Trunk Work Schedules Program 41 06 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 07 Weekly Schedule Setup Level SA Input Data Item No Day Number Time Pattern Default 01 1 Sunday 0 4 0 No 0 2 Monday 0 4 0 No 0 3 Tuesday 0 4 0 No 0 4 Wednesday 0 4 0 No 0 5 Thursday 0 4 0 No 0 6 Friday 0 4 0 No 0 7 Saturday 0 4 0 No...

Page 550: ...Overflow None 1 Overflow with No Announcement 2 No Overflow with First Announcement Only 3 No Overflow with First Second Announcements 4 Overflow with First Announcement Only 5 Overflow with First Second Announcement 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 No Overflow with Second Announcement Only 9 Overflow with Second Announcement Only 0 02 Overflow Destination 0 No Setting 1 64 Group 65 Overflow Table Program ...

Page 551: ...sue 1 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 511 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center 06 Incoming Ring Group when Overflow 1 100 Used when 41 08 02 is set to 68 1 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 552: ...h a call is transferred when overflow occurs Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 09 Overflow Table Setting Level SA Input Data Group No 01 64 Item No Priority Order Number Transfer Group Number With Overflow Default 01 1 7 0 65 0 No Setting 65 In Skin Voice Mail Integration 0 ...

Page 553: ... Item No Item Input Data Default 01 1st Delay Announcement ACI Port Number 0 96 0 No Setting 0 02 2nd Delay Announcement ACI Port Number 0 96 0 No Setting 0 03 1st Delay Announcement Connection Timer Set the time before the 1st Delay Announcement is played 0 64800 sec 4 04 2nd Delay Announcement Connection Timer Set the time the 1st Delay Announcement plays before the 2nd Delay Announcement starts...

Page 554: ...sage Number Input the VRS Message to be played as the 1st Delay Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 03 1st Delay Message Sending Count Input the number of times the 1st Delay Message is sent If set to 0 the message is not played 0 255 0 04 2nd Delay Message Number Input the VRS Message to be played as the 2nd Delay Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 05 2nd Waiting Message Se...

Page 555: ...5 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center 08 Queue Depth Announcement Input when the Queue Depth Announcement is played 0 Disable 1 After 1st 1st 2 After 2nd 2nd 3 After 1st and 2nd 1st and 2nd 0 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 556: ...r pilot number calls Conditions The Night Announcement function is not available for pilot number call Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 12 Night Announcement Setup Level SA Input Data Group Number 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Night Announcement Source Type 0 ACI 1 VRS 0 02 Night Announcement ACI Port Number Only used when PRG 41 12 01 is set to 0 0 96 0 No...

Page 557: ...gned as VRS in Program 41 12 01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 13 VRS Message Number for Night Announcement Level SA Input Data Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 VRS Message Number Input the VRS Message to use for the Night Announcement 0 100 0 No Message 0 02 Tone Kind at Message Interval Input what is heard between the Night Announc...

Page 558: ... Call to system supervisory extension when group supervisory extension is busy 1 No calls to system supervisory extension when group supervisory extension is busy 0 02 Automatic Wrap Up Mode Enable Disable Automatic Wrap Up mode 0 After wrap up the mode key is pressed Manual 1 After call is finished automatically Auto 0 03 Priority for Overflow Calls Determine whether the group should use its own ...

Page 559: ... rings an idle extension before routing to the next agent 0 64800 sec 10 12 Start Headset Ear Piece Ringing for SLT 0 64800 sec 0 13 1st Data Queue 1 Digit Assignment 1st Data Up to one Digit 0 1 9 Blank 2nd Data Destination Number Type 2nd Data 0 None 1 Extension or Voice Mail 2 Incoming Ring Group 3 Speed Dial Areas 4 Group 0 3rd Data Destination Number 3rd Data Up to eight digits 0 1 9 Blank 14...

Page 560: ...Issue 1 0 2 520 Program 41 ACD Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center ...

Page 561: ...ogram 41 20 Queue Status Display Yes Queue Status Display Time Yes Alarm Yes Yes Alarm Send Time Program 41 15 02 determines the length interval of the alarm Yes Interval Time of Queue Status Display Yes Class of Service Yes Timing of Alarm and Display Queue Status Alarm triggered after the number of calls in Program 41 15 01 is exceeded Alarm triggered after the number of calls in Program 41 20 0...

Page 562: ...Issue 1 0 2 522 Program 41 ACD Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center ...

Page 563: ...41 16 Threshold Overflow Level SA Input Data Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Number of Calls in Queue Define the maximum number of calls allowed in the queue before overflow occurs 0 400 0 No Limitation 0 02 Operation Mode for Queue Define how the system should handle calls when the number of calls in queue exceeds the threshold 0 The last waiting call is transferred 1 The longes...

Page 564: ... AIC Logout service codes for the AIC members in Program 11 13 08 and 11 13 09 Conditions If set to 1 note that a supervisor cannot log in out an AIC member as they are not normal agents Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 17 Login Mode Setup Level SA Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Login Mode Default 01 0 Normal Login Mode 1 AIC Login Mode 0 ...

Page 565: ... 01 Agent Identity Code Up to four digits No Setting 02 Default Group Number 0 64 0 No Setting 0 03 Group Number in Mode 1 0 64 0 No Setting 0 04 Group Number in Mode 2 0 64 0 No Setting 0 05 Group Number in Mode 3 0 64 0 No Setting 0 06 Group Number in Mode 4 0 64 0 No Setting 0 07 Group Number in Mode 5 0 64 0 No Setting 0 08 Group Number in Mode 6 0 64 0 No Setting 0 09 Group Number in Mode 7 0...

Page 566: ...Issue 1 0 2 526 Program 41 ACD Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 567: ...e Sending Count Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending Count This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play 0 No message is played 1 255 0 04 Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcement Message Assign the Voice Mail Announcement Mailboxes as the message source for the 2nd Announcement Message Dial up to eight digits No Setting 05 2nd Delay Message Sending Count Determine the 2nd Delay Mess...

Page 568: ... 0 2 528 Program 41 ACD Setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 08 Delay Message Interval Time Set the time for the interval between the Delay Messages 0 64800 sec 20 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 569: ...5 is set Program 41 ACD Setup 41 20 Queue Display Settings Level SA Feature Available in Program 41 15 Available in Program 41 20 Queue Status Display Yes Queue Status Display Time Yes Alarm Yes Yes Alarm Send Time Program 41 15 02 determines the length interval of the alarm Yes Interval Time of Queue Status Display Yes Class of Service Yes Timing of Alarm and Display Queue Status Alarm triggered ...

Page 570: ... display remains on the telephone display 0 64800 sec 5 sec 03 Queue Status Display Interval Set the time that refreshes the Queue Status Alarm time in queue display and causes the optional queue alarm to occur on phones active on a call logged out or in wrap up 0 64800 sec 60 sec 04 Call Waiting Alarm Enable Disable the queue alarm 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On 0 05 Call Waiting Alarm Hold Time Set t...

Page 571: ... Based Routing Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 21 Login ID Setup Level SA Input Data Login ID 01 960 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Login ID Code Input the Login ID s to be used Up to 20 digits No Setting 02 Skill Table Number Input the Skill Table number to be used for each Login ID 0 1 960 0 ...

Page 572: ...n use or not use Skill Based Routing Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 22 Skill Based Routing Setup Level SA Input Data Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Skill Base Routing This option determines if the Skill Based Routing is Used 1 or Not Used 0 0 Off 1 On 0 ...

Page 573: ... for each Group Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Contact Center Program 41 ACD Setup 41 23 Skill Table Setup Level SA Input Data Skill Table 1 960 Input Data Group No 01 64 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Skill Level Input the Skill Level for each Queue for each Skill Table number 1 7 Level 1 is the highest level 1 ...

Page 574: ...p Enable Disable the availability of setting that the Agent can mark the originator caller ID system base 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 Agent Info for Caller ID Set whether the Agent ID or extension number of the Agent is used to mark with the CID in the buffer 0 Agent Extension Number 1 Agent ID 0 03 Caller ID Buffer Clear Timer Set time interval for clearing stored Caller ID record in buffer 1 168 hou...

Page 575: ...ake Up Calls You must make an entry for this program if you have selected 1 or 2 in Item 01 above 0 100 0 No Setting 0 03 Wake Up Call No Answer 0 No Transfer 1 Transfer to the Operator 0 04 Setup Message Mode for Wake Up Call Hotel Mode 0 Confirmation Tone 1 VRS Message 2 VRS Message Time 0 05 Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0 100 0 No Setting 0 06 Flexible Room Status 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 07 Sno...

Page 576: ...Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code 9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42 01 06 is set to 0 Disabled Change Status Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 0 Code Code Original Status Code 1 N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Code 2 Y N Y Y Y Y ...

Page 577: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 537 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel ...

Page 578: ...triction Class When Check In Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class when it is checked in The system has 15 Toll Restriction Classes 1 15 The entry you make in this option affects the telephone in all Night Service modes Refer to Programs 21 05 and 21 06 to set up the Toll Restriction dialing options When the extension is checked out it uses the Toll Restriction Class set in Program 21 04 1 15...

Page 579: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 539 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel ...

Page 580: ...rams 20 06 20 14 Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 03 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Level IN Input Data Class of Service Number 01 15 Item No Item Input Data Default Class 01 Class 02 15 01 Check In Operation 0 Off 1 On 0 0 02 Check Out Operation 0 Off 1 On 0 0 03 Room Status Output 0 Off 1 On 0 0 04 DND Setting for Other Extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 05 Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension 0 Off 1 ...

Page 581: ... 10 Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 11 Change Room Status for Own Extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 12 SLT Room Monitor Enable 1 Disable 0 a single line telephone ability to use Room Monitor 0 Off 1 On 0 0 13 PMS Restriction Level 0 Off 1 On 0 0 Item No Item Input Data Default Class 01 Class 02 15 ...

Page 582: ...e 1 9 0 The destination can be any code with up to four digits such as an extension number or access code Conditions The one digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the interdigit time expires before executing Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 04 Hotel Mode One Digit Service Codes Level IN Input Data Department Extension Group Number 01 64 Item No Rece...

Page 583: ...ire a digital terminal and a compatible external device Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port or when using digital terminals a CTA or CTU adapter and a compatible external device Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 05 Hotel Room Status Printer Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Output Port Type 0 Not assigned 1 Not used 2 Reserved 3 LAN 0 03 ...

Page 584: ...heckIn Message Type 0 Off 1 On 0 04 CheckOut Auto Status Change 0 Off 1 On 0 05 AREYUTHERE LINETEST Send Timing 1 128 sec 10 06 AREYUTHERE LINETEST Send Count 0 20 times 3 07 Check out Auto Flexible Status Change When PRG42 06 07 and PRG42 06 04 are both enabled the status programmed in PRG42 06 08 is set upon checkout regardless of the previous room status 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 08 Status for Check...

Page 585: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 545 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel ...

Page 586: ...estriction class on check in for a room PRG 42 02 02 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 07 PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table Level IN Input Data Restriction Level 0 3 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table 1 15 Level 0 10 Level 1 11 Level 2 12 Level 3 13 ...

Page 587: ...tus message number 4 If in the SV9100 room status 1 is assigned to a room the PVA PMS interface will send status message number 4 to the PMS Application If nothing is assigned in PRG 42 09 01 the default room status codes are sent as defined in the PMS Developer Guide Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Hotel Motel Program 42 Hotel Setup 42 09 Flexible Setup for Room Status Level IN Input Data...

Page 588: ...Issue 4 0 2 548 Program 42 Hotel Setup ...

Page 589: ...m No Item Input Data Default 01 ARS F Route Time Schedule If this option is set to 0 the F Route table selected is determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to the day or time of the call If this option is set to 1 the system first refers to Program 44 10 If there is a match the pattern defined in that program is used If not the F Route pattern in Program 44 09 and time setting in ...

Page 590: ...eleting the front digit s Additional Data Assign the digit s to be deleted on top of the number for extension number usage At least one digit must be deleted Service Type 2 ARS F Route The number is controlled by ARS F Route table Additional Data If the ARS F Route Time Schedule is not used assign the ARS F Route table number for Program 44 05 If the ARS F Route Time Schedule is used assign the AR...

Page 591: ...m 44 05 Program 44 01 1 ARS F Route Select Table Number 0 500 0 No Setting Refer to Program 44 04 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Number 0 4 0 No Setting Refer to Program 44 03 1 Delete Digit 0 255 255 Delete All Digits 2 0 500 0 No Setting 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Number 0 4 0 No Setting 0 04 Dial Tone Simulation Enable to send dial tone to the calling party after the routing is determined T...

Page 592: ...be searched If the received digits are not identified in tables 1 250 the F Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 03 Dial Analysis Extension Table Level IN Input Data Extension Table Area Number 1 4 Dial Analysis Table Number 1 252 Dial Analysis Table Number 1 250 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Dial Up to 24 digits Digits 1 9 0 Press Line Key...

Page 593: ...ysis Table Number 251 Item No Item Input Data Default 03 ARS F Route Select Table Number 0 500 ARS F Route Table Number With Program 44 01 set to 0 Program 44 05 is checked With Program 44 01 set to 1 Program 44 04 is checked 0 Dial Analysis Table Number 252 Item No Item Input Data Default 04 Next Table Area Number 0 4 0 ...

Page 594: ...ute table number for each ARS F Route time mode There are eight time modes for ARS F Route Access Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ARS Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule Level IN Input Data ARS F Route Selection Number 1 500 Item No ARS F Route Time Mode ARS F Route Table Number Default 01 1 8 0 500 0 ...

Page 595: ...0 101 150 100 Networking ID 255 0 No Setting 1 100 Trunk Group from PRG 14 05 101 150 Networking 255 Extension Call 0 02 Delete Digits Enter the number of digits to be deleted from the dialed number 0 255 255 Delete All 0 03 Additional Dial Number Table Enter the table number defined in Program 44 06 for additional digits to be dialed 0 1000 0 04 Beep Tone Select whether or not a beep is heard if ...

Page 596: ...ment to use for the table If a Dial Treatment is selected Programs 44 05 02 and 44 05 03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment defined in Program 26 03 01 is used instead 0 15 0 09 Maximum Digit Input the maximum number of digits to send when using the F Route 0 24 0 10 CCIS over IP Destination Point Code Input the Destination Point Code to send when using this F Route 0 16367 0 11 Network Specified ...

Page 597: ...te number The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44 05 03 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ARS Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 06 Additional Dial Table Level IN Input Data Additional Dial Table Number 1 1000 Item No Additional Dial Default 01 Up to 24 digits Enter 1 9 0 Pause press LK 1 to enter a pause No Setting ...

Page 598: ...ed in Program 44 05 is activated The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 07 Gain Table for ARS F Route Access Level IN NOTE For ARS F Route calls the CODEC gains defined in Program 14 01 02 and 14 01 03 are not activated Input Data Ga...

Page 599: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 559 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ARS ...

Page 600: ... All Schedule Patterns 0 00 0 00 Mode 1 Example Pattern 1 Time Number 01 00 00 08 00 Mode 3 Time Number 02 08 00 18 00 Mode 1 Time Number 03 18 00 22 00 Mode 2 Time Number 04 22 00 00 00 Mode 3 Pattern 2 Time Number 01 0 00 0 00 Mode 2 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 08 Time Schedule for ARS F Route Level IN Input Data Schedule Pattern Number 01 10 Item No Time Number Start Time End Time Mode 01 0...

Page 601: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 561 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ARS ...

Page 602: ...m 44 08 01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ARS Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 09 Weekly Schedule for ARS F Route Level IN Input Data Item No Day Number Schedule Pattern Number Default 01 1 Sunday 1 10 Pattern 1 2 Monday 1 10 Pattern 1 3 Tuesday 1 10 Pattern 1 4 Wednesday 1 10 Pattern 1 5 Thursday 1 10 Pattern 1 6 Friday 1 10 Pattern 1 7 Saturday 1 10 Pattern 1 ...

Page 603: ... schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays The pattern number is defined in Program 44 08 01 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Automatic Route Selection ARS Program 44 ARS F Route Setup 44 10 Holiday Schedule for ARS F Route Level IN Input Data Item No Date Schedule Pattern Number Default 01 0101 1231 0 10 0 No Setting 0 ...

Page 604: ...Issue 4 0 2 564 Program 44 ARS F Route Setup ...

Page 605: ...rmally enable this option to allow for Voice Mail Call Screening Disable this option if your system has been modified so that extensions begin with the digit 1 e g 101 102 etc 0 Off 1 On 0 04 Park and Page Enable Disable the system ability to process the Voice Mail Park and Page commands You should normally enable this option 0 Off 1 On 1 05 Message Wait Enable Disable the system ability to proces...

Page 606: ... This is assigned only in the remote switches Dial up to eight digits No Setting 15 Analog Voice Mail Protocol Selection Assign whether fixed codes or the codes used in PRG 45 04 are used for analog voice mail protocol 0 Fixed 1 Program 0 16 Voice Mail Fax Digit Add Assignment Assign up to four digits in front of the station number sent to the SLT port when a call is forwarded Up to four digits No...

Page 607: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 567 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Mail Integration Analog ...

Page 608: ...il integration Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 45 Voice Mail Integration 45 02 NSL Option Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Send DTMF tone or 6KD message 0 Send DTMF tone to SLT VM port 1 Send 6KD message to Serial port 1 03 Send 51A Message 0 Off 1 On 1 05 Send 4 PM Message 0 Off 1 On 0 ...

Page 609: ...Assignment Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Remote Logon Internal Up to four digits None 02 Direct Logon Up to four digits None 03 Transfer Message Up to four digits None 04 Forward All Up to four digits None 05 Forward Busy Up to four digits None 06 Forward RNA Up to four digits None 07 Remote Logon Up to four digits None 08 Conversation Recording Up to four digits None 09 C...

Page 610: ...onditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 45 Voice Mail Integration 45 05 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Remote Log On Internal 0 Off 1 On 0 02 Direct Log On 0 Off 1 On 0 03 Transfer Message QVM 0 Off 1 On 0 04 Forward All 0 Off 1 On 0 05 Forward Busy 0 Off 1 On 0 06 Forward RNA 0 Off 1 On 0 07 Remote Log O...

Page 611: ...to take effect Modify the name for all UNIVERGE SV9100 VM8000 InMail ports The system briefly displays this name when a display multiline terminal user calls a Voice Mail port either by pressing Message their voice mail key or by dialing the master number You should always end the name with the characters The system substitutes the port number for the last Using the default name InMail for example...

Page 612: ...time cannot exceed 4095 seconds any setting in Subscriber Message Length larger than 409 has no effect on the length of recorded conversations 1 4095 sec 120 04 Non Subscriber Message Length Mbox Msg Length Set the maximum length of recorded messages for Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a Subscriber Mailbox Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subs...

Page 613: ...sage X M 08 Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number Pager Dial Delay Set the delay that occurs just before SV8100 InMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager Set this delay so the pager service has enough time to connect to the digital pager before sending the callback number Your pager service may be able to help you...

Page 614: ...s If the system dials the callout number and the pager service is busy it retries the number in one minute 1 255 min 15 10 Wait Between Non Pager Callout Attempts Notify N Pgr Intvl Set the minimum time between non pager Message Notification callouts in which the destination answers says Hello dials 1 to acknowledge and then enters the wrong security code 1 255 min 20 11 Wait Between Busy Non Page...

Page 615: ...ith insufficient outgoing message volume 1 255 min 30 13 Number of RNA Rings Notify RNA Rings If a non pager callout rings the destination longer than this number of rings SV8100 InMail marks the call as unanswered Ring No Answer and hangs up 1 99 rings 5 14 Number of Cascading Attempts Notify Call Attmpt With Cascade Pager Notification Set how many times a mailbox s enabled pager notification des...

Page 616: ...ber of times specified in 47 01 14 Number of Callout Attempts This option does not apply to Message Notification callouts to telephone numbers A digital pager notification is considered acknowledged when the recipient logs onto the mailbox 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled 0 16 Name Format Specify if names are displayed in First Last format or Last First 0 1st Last 1 Last 1st 0 18 Play PAD Control 1 57 ...

Page 617: ...asier consider associating a mailbox number with a station port For example mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1 which in turn corresponds to extension 101 0 None 1 Personal 2 Group Mailbox 1 1 Mailbox 2 960 0 02 Mailbox Number Select the extension number associated with the mailbox you are programming Normally mailbox 1 should use Mailbox Number 101 mailbox 2 should use Mailbox Number 102 etc To ...

Page 618: ...e Retention Determine how long a Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved messages If a message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval SV8100 InMail deletes it 1 99 Days 0 Indefinite 0 07 Recording Conversation Beep Rec Conv Beep Enable Disable the Conversation Record beep If enabled all parties on a call hear the voice prompt Recording followed by a single beep when the extens...

Page 619: ...nsfer UTRF If disabled Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally 0 No Disable 1 Yes Enable 0 11 Auto Time Stamp Enable Disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox If enabled after the subscriber listens to a message SV8100 InMail announces the time and date the message was left Auto Time Stamp also announces the message sender if known A subscriber also can enable Auto ...

Page 620: ...fer to Table 2 13 47 02 16 Default Table 1 17 Enable Paging 0 No Disable 1 Yes Enable 0 18 Paging Option 0 RNA 1 Immediately 0 19 Telephone User Interface Type 0 Numeric 1 Mnemonic 0 20 Enable E mail Notification 0 No 1 Yes 0 21 E mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting 22 Include Message as Attachment 0 No 1 Yes 1 23 All Message Notification Enabled This setting controls whether voice and pag...

Page 621: ...3 47 02 16 Default Table Item Name Input Data 47 02 16 Voice Prompt Language 01 US English 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin American Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 ...

Page 622: ...Issue 4 0 2 582 Program 47 InMail Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 623: ...Item No Item Input Data Default 02 Mailbox Number Mailbox Number The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the Department Group master pilot number Select the Department Group master pilot number associated with the Group Mailbox you are programming Digits eight maximum using 0 9 No Setting entered by pressing Hold No Setting 03 Group Mailbox Type Mailbox Type Set the Group Mailbox type 0 Undefined ...

Page 624: ...age playback order When a subscriber listens to their messages VM8000 InMail can play the oldest messages first or the newest messages first 0 FIFO first in first out or oldest messages first 1 LIFO last in first out or newest messages first 0 03 Auto Erase Save of Messages Determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits the mailbox without ...

Page 625: ... too long The UNIVERGE SV9100 telephone system software provides an additional Conversation Record beep This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45 01 06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record Alert Tone Interval Time 0 64800 seconds To disable the UNIVERGE SV9100 telephone system Conversation Record beep enter 0 for this option 0 No Disable 1 Yes Enable 1 06 Message Waiting Lamp Updat...

Page 626: ...e additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls see Next Call Routing Mailbox below If enabled a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any option in the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table If disabled the caller can dial only 0 to use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action 0 No Disable 1 Yes Enable 0 12 Next Call Routing Mailbox Next CR Mbo...

Page 627: ...No 1 Yes 0 23 Security Code Option 0 Always 1 Remote Logon only 0 24 Group Subscriber Options Auto Play 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 25 Email Message Save Delete Option Either save or delete the message in the Group Subscriber Mailbox after email is sent 0 No change 1 Save 2 Delete 0 26 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Queuing Use this option to enable or disable Message Notification Queuing I...

Page 628: ...ralian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin American Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Mandarin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Reserved 26 Russian ...

Page 629: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 589 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 630: ...Mail Routing Mailbox Options Level IN Input Data Routing Mailbox Number 1 32 Item No Item Input Data Default 02 Routing Mailbox Type Mailbox Type Set the Routing Mailbox type 0 None 1 Call Routing 2 Announcement 3 Directory 4 Distribution Mailboxes 01 08 1 Call Routing Mailboxes 09 32 2 Announcement 03 Prompt Language Refer to Table 2 15 47 07 03 Default Table 1 04 Telephone User Interface 0 Numer...

Page 631: ...lish 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin American Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Mandarin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Reserved 26 Russian ...

Page 632: ...Issue 4 0 2 592 Program 47 InMail Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 633: ...is option has a similar function as Customize Mailbox Options Call Routing Call Handling Options Delay Rings Before Redirect Transfer in SV8100 InMail 0 255 sec Entering 0 causes immediate recall 15 03 Time Limit for Dialing Commands Dialing Timeout Determine the time SV8100 InMail waits for an Automated Attendant caller to dial before routing the call to the Timeout destination Be sure your Dial ...

Page 634: ...00 InMail Automated Attendant when using this Call Routing Mailbox detects incoming fax CNG tone The fax call then routes to the company fax machine according to the setting of 47 01 06 Fax Extension If disabled the Automated Attendant does not detect incoming fax calls 0 No Disable 1 Yes Enable 0 05 Fax Extension Up to eight digits No entry Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 635: ...ang Up After below For more detail on this interaction refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the SV8100 InMail System Guide Call Routing Mailbox Number 1 32 0 Undefined 0 02 Repeat Count Enter the number of times you want the Announcement Mailbox message to repeat to callers After an Announcement Mailbox caller initially listens to the message it r...

Page 636: ...ll Routing Mailbox and Repeat Count above provide additional routing options to Automated Attendant callers For more detail on this interaction refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the SV8100 InMail System Guide 0 None 1 Goodbye 2 Silent 0 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 637: ...by the selected Answer Table Answer Table 1 16 1 02 Record PAD Control 1 57 15 5dB 12 5dB 32 0dB 03 Voice Prompt Language This program is used to assign a language to calls that did not originally go through the voice mail auto attendant For example a call rings directly to extension 101 which is forwarded to voice mail Extension 101 is set to use English but the customer wants calls on trunk 10 t...

Page 638: ...tralian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin American Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Mandarin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Arabic 26 Russian ...

Page 639: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 599 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 640: ...VM8000 InMail Answer Table Schedule Program 47 InMail 47 11 VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options Level IN Input Data Answer Table Number 1 16 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Answer Schedule Override Schedule Override Enable Disable Answer Schedule Override for the selected Answer Table If enabled and you make an entry for Override Mailbox below the active Answer Table routes calls to the Override...

Page 641: ...ded announcement Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed VM8000 InMail then hangs up reroutes the call or provides additional dialing options If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table If any of the Input Data values are entered the terminal displays the Override...

Page 642: ...ditional dialing options If the Default Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table If any of the Input Data values are entered the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number selection below 0 Undefined 1 Subscriber Mailbox STA 2 Group Mailbox 3 Routing Mailbox Answer Table 1 3 Answer Table 2...

Page 643: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 603 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 644: ...of the following types 1 Day of the Week A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a specific day of the week For this type of schedule you select The day of the week the schedule should run The schedule start time The schedule end time The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer calls 2 Range of Days A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range of days For this type of schedule you select The day...

Page 645: ...the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting if recorded and can leave a message If the Answering Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox the outside caller hears the recorded announcement Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed VM8000 InMail then hangs up reroutes the call or provides additional dialing options If the Answering Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox the outside caller hear...

Page 646: ...ber 31 0000 No date set 0000 07 Schedule Start Time Entryxx Start Time Specify the time the Answer Schedule should start It applies to Day of the Week Type 1 Range of Days Type 2 and Date Type 3 schedules To make a schedule run continuously make the same entry for 47 12 07 Schedule Start Time and 47 12 08 Schedule End Time HHMM 24 hour clock For example 0130 1 30AM 1700 5 00PM Answer Table 1 Sched...

Page 647: ...AM to 5 00PM Schedule 2 uses Subscriber Mailbox 3 and runs Wednesday from 10 30AM to 5 00PM Schedule 3 uses Routing Mailbox 4 and runs Tuesday from 9 00AM to 10 00AM At all other times routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47 11 03 Default Mailbox Category and 47 11 03 Default Mailbox Number When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types build the Answer Schedules in the follow...

Page 648: ...om10 30AM to 5 00PM 47 12 01 Entry01 Schedule Type 1 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Ctg 1 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Num 3 47 12 03 Entry01 Day 4 47 12 04 Entry01 Start Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 05 Entry01 End Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 06 Entry01 Date MMDD 0000 Entry does not matter 47 12 07 Entry01 Start Time 1030 10 30AM 47 12 08 Entry01 End Time 1700 5 00PM Answer Schedule 3 Answer Schedule 3 is ...

Page 649: ...uns Sunday through Wednesday from 8 30AM to 5 00PM Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Thursday and Friday from 11 00AM to 1 00PM At all other times routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47 11 03 Default Mailbox Category and 47 11 03 Default Mailbox Number When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types build the Answer Schedules in the following order Range of Days Day o...

Page 650: ...nd Day 4 Wednesday 47 12 06 Entry01 Date MMDD 0000 Entry does not matter 47 12 07 Entry01 Start Time 0830 8 30AM 47 12 08 Entry01 End Time 1700 5 00PM Answer Schedule 2 Answer Schedule 2 is a Range of Days schedule that runs Thursday and Friday from 11 00AM to 1 00PM 47 12 01 Entry01 Schedule Type 2 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Ctg 3 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Num 2 47 12 03 Entry01 Day 1 Entry does not matter 47...

Page 651: ...s schedule that starts schedule that runs every day from 8 30AM to 5 00PM 47 12 01 Entry01 Schedule Type 2 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Ctg 3 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Num 1 47 12 03 Entry01 Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 04 Entry01 Start Day 1 Sunday 47 12 05 Entry01 End Day 1 Sunday 47 12 06 Entry01 Date MMDD 0000 Entry does not matter 47 12 07 Entry01 Start Time 0830 8 30AM 47 12 08 Entry01 End Time 1700 5...

Page 652: ...Issue 4 0 2 612 Program 47 InMail Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 653: ...les Program 47 InMail 47 13 VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables Level IN Trunks Route to Answer Table 1 47 10 01 Answer Table Assignment InMail Default Automated Attendant Answering Answer Table 1 47 11 Answer Table Options Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox 47 12 Answer Schedules 47 11 05 Default Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox 1 47 08 Call Routing Mailbox Options All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1 S...

Page 654: ...responding Number To have Screened Transfer call a specific extension the corresponding Number option should be that extension number The caller then dials that single digit to reach the extension For example to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303 for key 8 enter TRF for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number UTRF Action Unscreened Transfer 2 UTRF Use this action to allow an Automa...

Page 655: ...for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number REC2 Action Quick Message Without Greeting 4 REC2 Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension With this action the caller does not hear the extension greeting prior to leaving the message Instead the caller hears the voice prompt Recording followed by a beep Number Option To have the caller leav...

Page 656: ...r Mailbox enter IXXX in the corresponding Number option For example to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Subscriber Mailbox number to log on for key 1 enter LOGON for the Action and IXXX for the corresponding Number Hang Up Action 6 HNGUP When an Automated Attendant caller presses a key assigned to this action VM8000 InMail says Goodbye and immediately hangs up Number Option No entry is required in...

Page 657: ...ber Caller Dialed Digits Entry X Entered by pressing LK2 Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call based on digits the caller dials Each X entry represents one caller dialed digit For example to set up a TRF Action to route to any caller dialed extension in the 301 399 range for 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number Ignore Digits Entry I Entered by pressing LK...

Page 658: ...r dialed extension UND Undefined 4 UND Undefined UND Undefined 5 UND Undefined UND Undefined 6 UND Undefined UND Undefined 7 UND Undefined UND Undefined 8 UND Undefined UND Undefined 9 HNGUP Hangup UND Undefined 0 UTRF to 101 Unscreened Transfer to 101 UND Undefined REC1 to IXXX Quick Message with greeting to user dialed extension UND Undefined LOGON to IXXX Logon to user dialed mailbox UND Undefi...

Page 659: ...y Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 47 InMail 47 15 Routing Directory Mailbox Options Level IN Input Data Master Mailbox Number 1 32 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Minimum Number of Letters Required 1 3 1 02 Directory List Number to Use 1 8 1 03 Name Match 0 First 1 Last 0 04 Transfer Option 0 TRF 1 UTRF 0 05 Screened Transfer Timeout 0 255 15 06 Time Limit for Dialing Comma...

Page 660: ...istribution Mailbox Options Level IN Input Data Routing Mailbox Number 1 32 Entry Number 00 19 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Distribution Mailbox Category Use Undefined 0 to skip Mailbox Number setting Use Station Mailbox 1 for setting Mailbox Number to 1 896 PRG 47 02 Use Group Number 2 for setting Group Mailbox 1 32 PRG 47 03 0 Undefined 1 Station Mailbox 2 Group Mailbox 0 Distribution Mail...

Page 661: ...TP Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 SMTP Enabled 0 No 1 Yes 0 02 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 03 SMTP Port 0 65535 25 04 Encryption 0 No 1 Yes 0 05 Authentication 0 No 1 Yes 2 POP3 0 06 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 07 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting 08 E mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting 09 Reply to Address Up to 48 characters...

Page 662: ...tions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 47 InMail 47 19 VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 02 POP3 Port 0 65535 110 03 Encryption 0 No 1 Yes 0 04 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 05 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting ...

Page 663: ...t Data Default 01 Notification 0 Off 1 On 0 02 Notification Begin Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 03 Notification End Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 04 Notification Type 0 Undefined 1 Voice 2 Pager 1 Voice 05 Notification Number Up to 16 digits No Setting 06 Notification Busy Attempts 1 99 attempts 5 07 Notification RNA Attempts 1 99 attempts 5 08 Notification Security 0 Off 1 On 1 09...

Page 664: ...eek Tuesday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 12 Notification Day of Week Wednesday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 13 Notification Day of Week Thursday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 14 Notification Day of Week Friday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 15 Notification Day of Week Saturday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 665: ...lt 01 Find Me Follow Me 0 Off 1 On 0 02 Find Me Follow Me Begin Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 03 Find Me Follow Me End Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 04 Find Me Follow Me Number Up to 16 digits No Setting 05 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Sunday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 06 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Monday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 07 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Tuesday 0 Disabled 1 ...

Page 666: ...ogram 47 InMail Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 10 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Friday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 11 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Saturday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 667: ...a Default 01 Notification 0 Off 1 On 0 02 Notification Begin Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 03 Notification End Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 04 Notification Type 0 Undefined 1 Voice 2 Pager 1 Voice 05 Notification Number Up to 16 digits No Setting 06 Notification Busy Attempts 1 99 attempts 5 07 Notification RNA Attempts 1 99 attempts 5 08 Notification Security 0 Off 1 On 1 09 Noti...

Page 668: ...eek Tuesday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 12 Notification Day of Week Wednesday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 13 Notification Day of Week Thursday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 14 Notification Day of Week Friday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 15 Notification Day of Week Saturday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 669: ... Find Me Follow Me 0 Off 1 On 0 02 Find Me Follow Me Begin Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 03 Find Me Follow Me End Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 04 Find Me Follow Me Number Up to 16 digits No Setting 05 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Sunday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 06 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Monday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 07 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Tuesday 0 Disabled 1 Enabl...

Page 670: ...ogram 47 InMail Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 10 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Friday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 11 Find Me Follow Me Day of Week Saturday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 671: ...ity of CCIS in the UNIVERGE SV9100 No other CCIS settings function if this program is disabled Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 01 CCIS System Setting Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 CCIS Availability 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 ...

Page 672: ...aling Channel T1 Specify the Trunk port to send D channel information This program is available for using DTI package 0 400 0 02 Common Signaling Channel Data Speed Assignment T1 Assign the baud rate of Common Signaling Channel on DTI package 0 64Kbps 1 56Kbps 2 48Kbps 1 3 48Kbps 2 1 03 Originating Point Code Assign the Point Code of own side 0 16367 0 04 Destination Point Code T1 Assign the Point...

Page 673: ... SV9100 Programming Manual 2 633 Conditions If 56K K CCIS is used 24 Multi Frame ESF must be assigned in Program 10 03 02 DPC must be what the OPC is on the opposite side of the link Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 674: ... Default 01 Destination Point Code Define the Point Code at the Destination Party 0 16367 0 02 CCIS Route ID T1 only Select the CCIS Route ID defined in Program 14 13 when the user tries to access the system in a CCIS network 0 8 CCIS Route IDs 5 8 are for future use and should not be used 0 03 IP Address IP only Assign the IP Address to a CCIS System ID xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 0 0 0 0 04 Point ...

Page 675: ...umbering Plan Conditions This program is used only in an Open Numbering Plan network This should include the Trunk Access Code and Office Code number Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 04 CCIS Office Code Assignment Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 CCIS Office Code xxxx up to four digits 0 9 No Setting ...

Page 676: ...5 CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter to define the maximum hop counter of call forwarding Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 05 CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter Level IN Item Input Data Default Maximum Hop Counter 1 7 5 ...

Page 677: ...06 CCIS Feature Availability Level IN Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Link Reconnect 0 Not available 1 Available 1 If this data is set to 0 Link Reconnect does not work 02 Centralized Day Night Switching for message receiver side 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 If this data is turned to 0 Day Night mode is not changed even if system receives Switching message from center 03 Adding Dial Digits ...

Page 678: ...ons None Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 07 CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Destination Point Code 0 16367 0 Define the Point Code of Billing Center Office 02 CCIS Route ID 0 8 0 Define the CCIS Route ID to send Billing Center Office 03 Billing Message Format 0 Normal F...

Page 679: ...in this program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 08 CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment Level IN Input Data BLF Sending Group 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Destination Point Code 0 16367 0 Define the Point Code of Billing Center Office 02 CCIS Route ID 0 8 0 Define the CCIS Route ID to send Billin...

Page 680: ...F to Send Group 1 assigned in PRG 50 08 XX 03 Send to Sending Group 2 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Enable Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 2 assigned in PRG 50 08 XX 04 Send to Sending Group 3 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Enable Disable the ability to send the BLF to Send Group 3 assigned in PRG 50 08 XX 05 Send to Sending Group 4 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Enable Disable the ability to send the BLF to...

Page 681: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 641 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 682: ...efine the time to send BLF messages Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 10 CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Type of Interval Time Define the time to send BLF messages 0 4 seconds 1 8 seconds 2 12 seconds 3 16 seconds 0 ...

Page 683: ...ne Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 11 CCIS Centralized Day Night Switching Sending Group Assignment Level IN Input Data Day Night Mode Sending Group 1 16 Item No Item Input Data Default Description 01 Destination Point Code 0 16367 0 Define the Point Code for Day Night Switching 02 CCIS Route ID 0 8 0 Define the CCIS Route ID to send Day Nigh...

Page 684: ... Assignment to define corresponding night mode to switch to when Day Night mode switching message arrives Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 12 CCIS Centralized Day Night Mode to System Mode Assignment Level IN Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Day Mode 1 8 1 02 Night Mode 1 8 2 ...

Page 685: ...d Response Timeout Assignment to define the response timeout value Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 13 CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment Level IN Item No Item Input Data Default 01 IAI Response Timer 0 99 30 ...

Page 686: ...urn to eliminate the 9 on Caller ID redial except for 7 and 8 digit extensions Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 14 CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return Level IN Item No Item Input Data Default 01 CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return 0 24 0 Ignore setting 0 ...

Page 687: ...ss Reference None Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service 50 15 CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 02 TCP Server Port Number 0 65535 57000 03 TCP Client Base Port Number 0 65535 59000 04 Connection Method for Terminal Choose the connection method for the DT800 DT700 0 Peer to Peer disable 1 Peer to Peer enable 1 ...

Page 688: ...Issue 4 0 2 648 Program 50 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service ...

Page 689: ...etween nodes 0 50 0 No operation 0 02 Primary Candidate Order When the Primary system is turned off or disconnected from network this value is used to select a new Primary system Smaller number is higher priority If this value is the same number the System ID PRG51 01 01 is referred and the system which has the smaller number is selected as Primary system 1 50 30 03 Secondary System Flag 0 NetLink...

Page 690: ...buffering delay 1 Buffering Nagle Algorithm enabled This means that small data packets will not be transmitted immediately across the network The smaller data packets will be buffered and then sent across as larger data packets therefore decreasing the number of packets sent across the network When the number of packets sent across the network decreases the amount of bandwidth also decreases 0 Imm...

Page 691: ...em Input Data Default 01 System Name Enter the name given to each system Up to 20 characters blank 02 Primary System Clock Hour Offset Determine the time offset from the Primary system 0 12 1 11 2 10 12 0 13 1 14 2 24 12 This setting affects time display on MLT see 51 13 02 0 24 12 04 Authenticate System MAC Address To use this function set PRG 51 13 03 to 1 enable NetLink systems reject the conne...

Page 692: ...imary at least Feature Cross Reference None Program 51 NetLink Service 51 03 NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting Level IN Input Data List ID 1 50 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Internet Protocol Address List The system seeks the Primary system based on this list When there is no Primary system yet or Fail Over occurs Node List is referred to establish new link This setting is necess...

Page 693: ...s Reference None Program 51 NetLink Service 51 04 IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of NetLink Level IN Input Data List ID 1 50 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Internet Protocol Address of Top Priority Primary Enter the IP address of the Top Priority Primary System To use this feature set PRG 51 06 01 to 1 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 2...

Page 694: ... infinity 20 03 Primary Search Packet Sending Interval While searching the Primary system the system sends a packet at this interval 1 3600 sec 5 04 Primary Search Time Maximum Value Total Primary system seek time 5 10800 sec 20 05 Top Priority Primary Detection Packet Sending Interval When current Primary system is not Top Priority Primary System the system sends packet to check if Top Priority S...

Page 695: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 655 Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 696: ... Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Primary Integration Right or Wrong When LAN cable was divided multiple Primary systems may appear If the LAN connection is recovered multiple Net Links exist in the network When this option is enabling NetLink is composed around Top priority Primary System 0 Off 1 On 0 02 Package Reset Timing Option When Primary System Automatic Integration is done all packages ...

Page 697: ...ice 51 07 NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting Level IN Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Forced Change Primary System Enabling Set whether or not the Forced Change Primary is available 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 Package Reset Timing Option When Forced Change Primary System is done all packages reset Select the package reset timing 0 Reset when all packages are idle otherwise reject Prim...

Page 698: ... IMPORTANT This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Item No Item Input Data Default 01 IP Address of New Primary System Enter target IP address for New Primary system When the Forced Change Primary system is done this setting is erased 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 02 System ID of New Primary Syste...

Page 699: ...es with Primary system at this port number If 0 is specified temporary port is dynamically selected 0 65535 0 04 Primary Search Port When Fail Over occurs each system communicates with other system at this port number If 0 is set temporary port is dynamically selected If 0 is not specified the number and continuous maximum 50 number is used Ex 5000 is specified 5001 5002 5049 are used 0 65535 0 05...

Page 700: ...Issue 4 0 2 660 Program 51 NetLink Service Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 701: ...etwork There can be up to 240 virtual slots available in NetLink Conditions This Program is Read Only Feature Cross Reference None Program 51 NetLink Service 51 10 Virtual Slot Setting Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Number of Available Virtual Slots 240 slots can be controlled in NetLink This command can check how many slots are available ...

Page 702: ... Reference None Program 51 NetLink Service 51 11 NetLink System Information Level IN Input Data System ID 1 50 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 System Name For reference only blank 02 Connected State For reference only 0 03 IP Address For reference only 000 000 000 000 04 MAC Address For reference only 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 Primary Priority Level For reference only 0 06 Main Software Version For ...

Page 703: ...eature Cross Reference None Program 51 NetLink Service 51 12 Primary System Information Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 System ID For reference only 0 02 System Name For reference only blank 03 IP Address For reference only 000 000 000 000 04 MAC Address For reference only 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 Primary Priority Level For reference only 0 06 Main Software Version For reference...

Page 704: ... 01 Automatic IP Address List Operation Update When set to 1 the list in PRG51 03 01 is automatically updated 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On 1 02 Time Zone Option When set to 0 the following features are affected Clock Display Incoming Outgoing History List When set to 1 the following features are affected VRS Time Announce Date and Time Setting Service Code Alarm Clock setting and Hotel mode wake up c...

Page 705: ...rogram 51 NetLink Service 51 14 NetLink System Control Level IN IMPORTANT This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data System ID 1 50 Menu Number 1 System information deletion Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Delete System Information Delete system information and the slot information The system must be disconnected 1 50 1 ...

Page 706: ... is executed Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 51 NetLink Service 51 15 Demonstration Setting Level IN IMPORTANT This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Menu Number 1 Primary automatic setting 2 Secondary 1 automatic operation setting 3 Secondary 2 automatic operation setting 4 Secondary 3 automatic operation setting ...

Page 707: ...set in Item 03 below 0 Disable 1 Setting Time Mode 2 Interval Mode 1 02 System Data Replication Time Setting Set the time of day that both systems synchronize database when Item 01 is set to 1 0000 2359 0200 03 System Data Replication Interval Setting Set the time interval that both systems synchronize database when Item 01 is set to 2 15 1440 minutes 30 min 04 Replication Time Stamp Show next rep...

Page 708: ...Issue 4 0 2 668 Program 51 NetLink Service Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 709: ...ature Cross Reference None Program 51 NetLink Service 51 17 NetLink DT80 DT700 Server Individual Information Setup Level IN Input Data System ID 1 50 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Register Port Use to set the SIP Register Port of each system 0 65535 5080 02 Subscribe Session Port Use to set the SIP Subscribe Session Port number of each system when NetLink is used 0 65535 5081 ...

Page 710: ...Fail Over limits Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 51 NetLink Service 51 18 NetLink Configuration Options Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 NetLink Fail Over Limit When tear down of network was repeated more than the specified times NetLink is operated standalone 0 2 10 0 Infinity 0 ...

Page 711: ...Feature Cross Reference None Program 51 NetLink Service 51 19 NetLink IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Level IN Input Data Extensions 001 960 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 NetLink CPN Transmission This program assigns transmission of Calling Party Number CPN from PRG 21 19 for each secondary system The transmission applies for every extension 0 Disable 1 Enable...

Page 712: ...Issue 4 0 2 672 Program 51 NetLink Service ...

Page 713: ...ination of 32 Basic Tones Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 01 Service Tone Setup Level IN Input Data Service Tone Number 01 64 Item No Item Input Data 01 Repeat Count 0 255 0 until On Hook Unit Number 1 8 Item No Item Input Data 02 Basic Tone Number 1 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 03 Duration Count 1 255 100 25500ms 04 Gain Level dB 1 57 15 5 12 5 ...

Page 714: ...9 02 520 13 18 650 780 13 19 03 580 13 19 780 1040 13 19 04 660 13 20 1040 13 05 700 13 21 450 13 06 800 13 22 950 13 07 880 13 23 1080 13 08 1050 13 24 400 450 13 13 09 350 440 16 16 25 Reserve 10 440 480 16 16 26 Reserve 11 480 620 21 21 27 Reserve 12 440 16 28 Reserve 13 Reserve 29 Reserve 14 520 650 19 13 30 Reserve 15 650 780 19 13 31 Reserve 16 780 1040 19 13 32 Reserve ...

Page 715: ... 6dB 20 6dB 7 DND Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 2 2 32 0dB 32 0dB 8 B Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 11 5 5 20 6dB 20 6dB 9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 Basic 2 11 0 3 2 20 6dB 20 6dB 10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 11 Internal Confirmation Tone 3 Basic 2 0 6 5 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 12 Internal Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 0dB 13 External Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 0dB 14 Intercom Ringback Tone 0 B...

Page 716: ...14 9dB 32 0dB 23 Door Box Chime 5 3 Basic 6 7 7 5 5 5 0 1 1 2 2 3 2 38 3dB 26 3dB 38 3dB 26 3dB 14 9dB 32 0dB 24 Door Box Chime 6 3 Basic 6 8 8 6 6 6 0 1 1 2 2 3 2 38 3dB 26 3dB 38 3dB 26 3dB 14 9dB 32 0dB 25 Service Set Tone 3 Basic 2 0 9 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 26 Service Clear Tone 3 Basic 2 0 9 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 27 Talkback Tone 2 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 28 Speaker Monitor Tone The originator ...

Page 717: ...Ring Busy Tone 0 Basic 6 0 11 0 11 10 0 5 5 5 5 10 20 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 40 Internal Call Waiting Tone 1 Basic 1 12 2 32 0dB 41 Intrusion Tone 1 Basic 1 12 5 32 0dB 42 Conference Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 0dB 43 Intrusion Tone 2 0 Basic 1 2 8 32 0dB 44 External Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 1 26 3dB 45 External Ring Back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 0 10 30 32 0dB 32 0dB 46 External Busy Tone 0 Ba...

Page 718: ...B 32 0dB 58 Opening Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 2 2 14 14 15 15 16 16 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 59 Ending Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 60 Splash Tone 1 Mute 1 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 8 12dB 8 12dB 61 Splash Tone 2 Mute 2 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 8 12dB 8 12dB 62 Splash Tone 3 Mute 3 Basic ...

Page 719: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 679 Conditions The system must be reset for any change to these items to take affect Feature Cross Reference Selectable Ring Tones ...

Page 720: ...line calls system wide Make separate entries for duration and pause It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 02 DTMF Tone Setup Level MF Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Duration 1 255 5 100ms 02 Pause 1 255 5 100ms 03 Tone Level Low dB 1 97 45 3 65 13dB 04 Tone Level High dB 1 97 45 3 69 11dB Duration Pa...

Page 721: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 681 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 722: ...runk 3 DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk 4 5 Reserved Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 03 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Level MF Input Data DTMF Tone Receiver Type No 1 DTMF Receiver for Extension 2 DTMF Receiver for Analog Trunk 3 DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk 4 Reserved 5 Reserved Item No Item Input Data 01 Detect Level 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm ...

Page 723: ...5 85dBm 0 to 100dBm 15 04 Max Detect Level 0 15 Detect Level 0 0dBm 0 to 15dBm 15 Detect Level 1 5dBm 0 to 20dBm 15 Detect Level 2 10dBm 0 to 25dBm 15 Detect Level 3 15dBm 0 to 30dBm 15 Detect Level 4 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 Detect Level 5 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 Detect Level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 Detect Level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 Detect Level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 Detect Level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 Dete...

Page 724: ...st level 0 1dBm 0 1dBm 0 1dBm 0 1dBm 0 1dBm 07 ON detect time 1 30ms Version 1000 1 30ms Version 1000 1 30ms Version 1000 1 30ms Version 1000 1 30ms Version 1000 3 60ms Version 3000 or higher 3 60ms Version 3000 or higher 3 60ms Version 3000 or higher 3 60ms Version 3000 or higher 3 60ms Version 3000 or higher 08 OFF detect time 1 30ms Version 1000 1 30ms Version 1000 1 30ms Version 1000 1 30ms Ve...

Page 725: ...nk 4 Special Busy Tone for Trunk 5 Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Level MF Input Data Tone Detector Type Number 1 Dial Tone for Trunk 2 Busy Tone for Trunk 3 Ring Back Tone for Trunk 4 Special Busy Tone for Trunk 5 Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk Item No Item Input Data 01 Detection Level 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dB...

Page 726: ...4 No Tone Time 0 255 30 30 7680ms 0 not detect 1 255 60 7680ms The formula is 30 30N When set to N 1 it means 30 30 1 60 When set to N 255 it means 30 30 255 7680 05 Pulse Count 1 255 06 ON Minimum Time 1 255 30 30 7680ms 07 ON Maximum Time 0 255 30 30 7680ms 08 OFF Minimum Time 1 255 30 30 7680ms 09 OFF Maximum Time 0 255 30 30 7680ms 12 Frequency No 1 1 8 Frequency Table No set by 80 07 13 Frequ...

Page 727: ...io 4 20dB 4 20dB 4 20dB 1 0 4 No tone time 132 3990ms 132 3990ms 132 3990ms 132 3990ms 0 5 Pulse Count 1 1 1 2 2 6 ON min time 9 300ms Version 1000 12 390ms 23 720ms 3 120ms 2 Version 1000 45 1380 ms Version 3000 or higher 5 180ms Version 3000 or higher 7 ON max time 0 20 630ms 74 2256ms 13 420ms 5 Version 1000 15 480ms Version 3000 or higher 8 OFF min time 1 60ms 12 390ms 59 1800ms 3 120ms 2 9 OF...

Page 728: ...en printing out the SMDR alarm report and system information report Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 05 Date Format for SMDR and System Level MF Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Date Format 0 American Format Month Day Year 1 Japanese Format Year Month Day 2 European Format Day Month Year 0 ...

Page 729: ...tion tone set with Program 80 04 12 and Program 80 04 13 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 07 Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup Level MF Input Data Frequency Table No Input Data Default 1 0 10 255 100 2550 Hz 0 Not used 35 350 Hz 2 44 440 Hz 3 48 480 Hz 4 62 620 Hz 5 110 6 0 7 0 8 0 ...

Page 730: ...1 Frequency 1 Refer to Table 2 18 Frequency 1 2 Table 8 for Confirmation Tone 8 for Error Tone 4 for Long Conversation Warning Tone 02 Frequency 2 Refer to Table 2 18 Frequency 1 2 Table 8 for Confirmation Tone 8 for Error Tone 4 for Long Conversation Warning Tone 03 Ring Cycle Refer to Table 2 19 Ring Cycle Table 1 for Confirmation Tone 14 for Error Tone 14 for Long Conversation Warning Tone NOTE...

Page 731: ... 06 250 On 250 Off 250 On Off 07 250 On 250 Off 250 On 250 Off 250 On Off 08 250 On 250 Off 250 On 250 Off 250 On 250 Off 250 On Off 09 325 On Off 10 325 On 325 Off 325 On Off 11 325 On 325 Off 325 On 325 Off 325 On Off 12 500 On Off 13 500 On 500 Off 500 On Off 14 1000 On Off Short Ring No Short Tone Name Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Ring Cycle 1 Confirmation Tone 8 8 1 2 Error Tone 8 8 14 3 Alarm Ton...

Page 732: ...Issue 4 0 2 692 Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None 32 Not defined 0 0 0 ...

Page 733: ...a 01 Detect Level 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm 02 Start delay time 0 255 0 25step 0ms 64ms 03 Min detect level 0 15 DTMF Tone 1 15dBm 0 to 30dBm 15 DTMF Tone 2 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 DTMF Tone 3 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 DTMF Tone4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 DTMF Tone 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 04 Max detect level 0 15 DTMF Tone 1 5dBm 0 to 20dBm 15 DT...

Page 734: ...em Name Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0 02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0 03 Min detect level 10 20dBm 10 20dBm 10 20dBm 10 20dBm 10 20dBm 04 Max detect level 2 2dBm 2 2dBm 2 2dBm 2 2dBm 2 2dBm 05 twist level 5 6dBm 5 6dBm 5 6dBm 5 6dBm 5 6dBm 06 S N ratio 2 10dBm 2 10dBm 2 10dBm 2 10dBm 2 10dBm 07 ON detect time 1 30ms 1 30ms 1 30ms 1 30ms 1 30ms 08 OFF detect time 1 30ms...

Page 735: ...ne Receiver Setup 2 to set further data for the DTMF signal detection Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 13 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup 2 Level MF Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Received Dialed 0 15 7dB 1 0dB 8 7dB 15 0dB 8 ...

Page 736: ...ther data for the DTMF signal detection Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 80 Basic Hardware Setup for System 80 14 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup 3 Level MF Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Received Dialed 0 13 6dB 1 0dB 7 6dB 13 0dB 7 02 Detect Type 0 Type 1 Normal 1 Type 2 Improvement of DTMF mis detection 0 ...

Page 737: ... loop start trunk disconnect recognition timer 1 255 8 2040ms 38 304ms 04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1 255 8 2040ms 13 104ms 05 Single Ringing Detection Minimum Time 0 255 0 8 2040ms 82 656ms 06 Double Ringing Detection Minimum Off Time 0 255 0 8 2040ms 13 104ms 07 Double Ringing Detection Maximum Off Time 0 255 0 8 2040ms 50 400ms 08 Ringing Signal not Detection Minimum 1 255 8 2040ms ...

Page 738: ...onnect Detect Minimum Time When using dial pulse trunks this timer is used to set the minimum value for the system to detect the disconnect pulse 1 255 8 2040ms 50 400ms 23 Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum Time When using dial pulse trunks this timer is used to set the maximum value for the system to detect the disconnect pulse 1 255 8 2040ms 80 640ms 24 On Hook Normal Detect Time 1 255 8 2040ms 2 2...

Page 739: ...Pulse Make Time 20pps 1 255 8 2040ms 2 16ms 32 DP Inter digit Time 20pps 1 255 32 8160ms 16 512ms 33 Charging Pulse Minimum Duration 1 255 9 34 Charging Pulse Minimum Period Time 1 255 29 35 Charging Pulse Minimum Interval 1 255 6 36 Long Ringing Detection Minimum Time 1 255 16 4080ms 150 2400ms Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 740: ...ion Time 1 255 100 25500ms 7 700ms 04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1 255 10 2550ms 10 100ms 05 Hook Flash Time 1 255 8 2040ms 25 200ms 06 Pause Time 1 255 32 8160ms 94 3008ms 07 WINK DELAY Duration Time 1 255 10 2550ms 20 200ms 08 Incoming WINK DELAY Send Time 1 255 100 25500ms 3 300ms 09 Seizure WINK DELAY Receive Max Time 1 255 100 25500ms 48 4800ms 10 Receive WINK DELAY Duration Min Ti...

Page 741: ...git Time 1 255 32 8160ms 6 192ms 17 Loop Off Guard Time 0 25 0 100 25500ms 20 2000ms 18 DP Break Time 10pps 1 255 4 1020ms 16 64ms 19 DP Make Time 10pps 1 255 4 1020ms 8 32ms 20 DP Inter Digit Time 10pps 1 255 16 4080ms 38 608ms 21 DP Break Time 20pps 1 255 4 1020ms 8 32ms 22 DP Make Time 20pps 1 255 4 1020ms 4 16ms 23 DP Inter Digit Time 20pps 1 255 16 4080ms 29 464ms Input Data Continued Item Na...

Page 742: ... Time 1 255 100 25500ms 7 700ms 04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1 255 10 2550ms 10 100ms 05 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1 255 100 25500ms 7 700ms 06 Hook Flash Time 1 255 10 2040ms 20 200ms 07 Pause Time 1 255 60 15300ms 50 3000ms 08 WINK DELAY Duration Time 1 255 10 2550ms 20 200ms 09 Incoming WINK DELAY Send Time 1 255 100 25500ms 3 300ms 10 Seizure WINK DELAY Receive Max Time 1 ...

Page 743: ... 100ms 17 Pause Time after WINK DELAY Receive 1 255 8 2040ms 13 104ms 18 Loop Off Guard Time 0 255 0 100 25500ms 20 2000ms 19 DP Break Time 10pps 1 255 2 512ms 32 64ms 20 DP Make Time 10pps 1 255 2 512ms 16 32ms 21 DP Inter digit Time 10pps 1 255 32 8160ms 19 608ms 22 DP Break Time 20pps 1 255 2 510ms 16 32ms 23 DP Make Time 20pps 1 255 2 510ms 8 16ms 24 DP Inter digit Time 20pps 1 255 32 8160ms 1...

Page 744: ...c data for layer 1 of ISDN BRI Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81 04 ISDN BRI Layer 1 T Point Initial Data Setup Level MF Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Wait time for Physical Activation Timer 3 1 255 200 5100ms 100 20sec 02 Detection time for Physical Deactivation 1 255 200 5100ms 5 1sec ...

Page 745: ...ay be initiated 1 255 100 25500ms 10 1sec 02 Timer T201 Specify the minimum time in 1 100ths of a second between retransmissions of the TEI Identity check messages 1 255 100 25500ms 10 1sec 03 Timer T202 Specify the minimum time in 1 100ths of a second between retransmissions of the TEI Identity check messages 1 255 100 25500ms 20 2sec 04 Timer T203 Specify the maximum time in 1 100ths of a second...

Page 746: ...ed 1 254 sec 15 03 T303 Specify the timer value started when SETUP is sent 1 254 sec 4 04 T304 Specify the timer value started when the SETUP ACK is received Timer is also restarted when INFO is received 0 254 sec 30 05 T305 Specify the timer value started when DISC without progress No 8 is sent 1 254 sec 30 06 T306 Specify the timer value started when DISC with progress indicator No 8 is sent Thi...

Page 747: ...y the timer value started when RESTART is sent T317 1 254 sec 120 15 T317 Specify the timer value started when RESTART is received 1 T316 1 60 16 T318 Specify the timer value started when RES is sent This timer is valid for user side use only 1 254 sec 4 17 T319 Specify the timer value started when SUSPEND is sent This timer is valid for user side use only 1 254 sec 4 18 T320 Specify the timer val...

Page 748: ...nk port Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 81 Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk 81 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port Level IN Input Data Trunk Number 1 400 CODEC Filter Type Default 0 No filter 1 Type 1 600 Line loss 0dB 500m from CO Ex 2 Type 2 600 Line loss 4dB 1 2km from CO Ex 3 Type 3 600 Line loss 8dB 3km from CO Ex 4 Type 4 Enable PRG81 17 setting 2 ...

Page 749: ...00ms 15 60ms 04 Answer Signal Detection Time E M 1 250 4ms 1000ms 15 60ms 05 Answer Signal Detection Time OPX 1 250 4ms 1000ms 15 60ms 06 Clear Signal Detection Time Loop 1 255 100ms 25500ms 6 600ms 07 Clear Signal Detection Time Ground 1 255 100ms 25500ms 6 600ms 08 Clear Signal Detection Time DID 1 255 100ms 25500ms 6 600ms 09 Clear Signal Detection Time E M 1 255 100ms 25500ms 6 600ms 10 Clear ...

Page 750: ...s 21 Loop Current Detection Time Loop 1 250 4ms 1000ms 40 160ms 22 Loop Current Detection Time Ground 1 250 4ms 1000ms 40 160ms 23 Loop Current Detection Time DID 1 250 4ms 1000ms 40 160ms 24 Loop Current Detection Time E M 1 250 4ms 1000ms 40 160ms 25 Loop Current Detection Time OPX 1 250 4ms 1000ms 40 160ms 26 DP Break Send Time ALL 1 250 4ms 1000ms 15 60ms 27 DP Make Send Time ALL 1 250 4ms 100...

Page 751: ...eive Max Time DID 1 255 100ms 25500ms 48 4800ms 42 Receive Wink Duration Min Time DID 1 250 8ms 2000ms 12 96ms 43 Receive Wink Duration Max Time DID 1 250 8ms 2000ms 45 360ms 44 Seizure WINK DELAY Receive Max Time E M 1 255 100ms 25500ms 48 4800ms 45 Receive Wink Duration Min Time E M 1 250 8ms 2000ms 12 96ms 46 Receive Wink Duration Max Time E M 1 250 8ms 2000ms 45 360ms 47 Receive DP Make Min Ti...

Page 752: ...s 25500ms 20 2000ms 60 Loop Off Guard Time OPX 1 255 100ms 25500ms 20 2000ms 61 Double Ringing Send Time 1 OPX 1 255 100ms 25500ms 5 500ms 62 Double Between Ringing Send Time 1 OPX 1 255 100ms 25500ms 5 500ms 63 Double Ringing Send Time 2 OPX 1 255 100ms 25500ms 25 2500ms 64 Double Between Ringing Send Time 2 OPX 1 255 100ms 25500ms 30 3000ms 65 Single Ringing Send Time OPX 1 255 100ms 25500ms 10 ...

Page 753: ...ms 40 4000ms 75 Guard Time 2 ALL 1 250 4ms 1000ms 6 24ms 76 Dial Sending Complete Time ALL 1 255 100ms 25500ms 6 600ms 77 ON HOOK bit Send Time ALL 1 255 100ms 25500ms 6 600ms 78 Open Loop Time Loop 1 255 100ms 25500ms 6 600ms 79 Open Loop Time Ground 1 255 100ms 25500ms 6 600ms 80 Open Loop Time DID 1 250 4ms 1000ms 13 52ms 81 Open Loop Time E M 1 250 4ms 1000ms 13 52ms 82 Open Loop Time OPX 1 25...

Page 754: ...03 B1 Filter Setup 3 0 255 162 04 B1 Filter Setup 4 0 255 42 05 B1 Filter Setup 5 0 255 18 06 B1 Filter Setup 6 0 255 178 07 B1 Filter Setup 7 0 255 220 08 B1 Filter Setup 8 0 255 55 09 B1 Filter Setup 9 0 255 163 10 B1 Filter Setup 10 0 255 42 11 B1 Filter Setup 11 0 255 51 12 B1 Filter Setup 12 0 255 36 13 B1 Filter Setup 13 0 255 210 14 B1 Filter Setup 14 0 255 64 15 B2 Filter Setup 1 0 255 52 ...

Page 755: ...oefficients 1 0 255 179 34 R Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 208 35 R Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 227 36 R Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 32 37 R Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 171 38 R Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 169 39 R Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 60 40 R Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 37 41 R Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 179 42 R Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 162 43 R Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 179 44 R Fi...

Page 756: ...45 53 X Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 170 54 X Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 164 55 X Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 74 56 X Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 159 57 X Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 61 58 X Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 79 59 GR Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 171 60 GR Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 65 61 GX Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 194 62 GX Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 224 Input Data Continued Ite...

Page 757: ...lter Setup 3 0 255 162 04 B1 Filter Setup 4 0 255 186 05 B1 Filter Setup 5 0 255 27 06 B1 Filter Setup 6 0 255 50 07 B1 Filter Setup 7 0 255 42 08 B1 Filter Setup 8 0 255 45 09 B1 Filter Setup 9 0 255 51 10 B1 Filter Setup 10 0 255 173 11 B1 Filter Setup 11 0 255 52 12 B1 Filter Setup 12 0 255 179 13 B1 Filter Setup 13 0 255 77 14 B1 Filter Setup 14 0 255 48 15 B2 Filter Setup 1 0 255 186 16 B2 Fi...

Page 758: ...R Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 29 34 R Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 171 36 R Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 32 37 R Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 187 38 R Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 42 39 R Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 162 40 R Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 183 41 R Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 50 42 R Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 162 43 R Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 35 4...

Page 759: ...2 X Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 144 53 X Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 1 54 X Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 144 55 X Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 1 56 X Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 144 57 X Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 1 58 X Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 144 59 GR Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 1 60 GR Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 17 61 GX Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 1 62 GX Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 14...

Page 760: ...3 B1 Filter Setup 3 0 255 162 04 B1 Filter Setup 4 0 255 51 05 B1 Filter Setup 5 0 255 34 06 B1 Filter Setup 6 0 255 162 07 B1 Filter Setup 7 0 255 171 08 B1 Filter Setup 8 0 255 50 09 B1 Filter Setup 9 0 255 179 10 B1 Filter Setup 10 0 255 90 11 B1 Filter Setup 11 0 255 50 12 B1 Filter Setup 12 0 255 163 13 B1 Filter Setup 13 0 255 42 14 B1 Filter Setup 14 0 255 48 15 B2 Filter Setup 1 0 255 36 1...

Page 761: ...oefficients 1 0 255 50 34 R Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 208 35 R Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 159 36 R Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 32 37 R Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 178 38 R Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 169 39 R Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 43 40 R Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 164 41 R Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 171 42 R Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 35 43 R Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 76 44 R Filt...

Page 762: ...e None 52 X Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 144 53 X Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 1 54 X Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 144 55 X Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 1 56 X Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 144 57 X Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 1 58 X Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 144 59 GR Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 1 60 GR Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 17 61 GX Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 1 62 GX Filter Coefficients 2 ...

Page 763: ...B1 Filter Setup 3 0 255 144 04 B1 Filter Setup 4 0 255 9 05 B1 Filter Setup 5 0 255 0 06 B1 Filter Setup 6 0 255 144 07 B1 Filter Setup 7 0 255 9 08 B1 Filter Setup 8 0 255 0 09 B1 Filter Setup 9 0 255 144 10 B1 Filter Setup 10 0 255 9 11 B1 Filter Setup 11 0 255 0 12 B1 Filter Setup 12 0 255 144 13 B1 Filter Setup 13 0 255 9 14 B1 Filter Setup 14 0 255 0 15 B2 Filter Setup 1 0 255 1 16 B2 Filter ...

Page 764: ... Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 46 34 R Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 1 36 R Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 17 37 R Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 1 38 R Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 144 39 R Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 1 40 R Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 144 41 R Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 1 42 R Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 144 43 R Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 1 44 R Filt...

Page 765: ...2 X Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 144 53 X Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 1 54 X Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 144 55 X Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 1 56 X Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 144 57 X Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 1 58 X Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 144 59 GR Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 1 60 GR Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 17 61 GX Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 1 62 GX Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 14...

Page 766: ...ilter Option Data Type Setup Level IN Input Data Line Type 1 COIU 082U COIDB 002U COIDB 2 DIOPU LD Trunk 3 TLIU 2W 4 TLIU 4W Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Option Type 0 None 1 Type 5 600Ω Line loss 2dB 2 Type 6 China standard 200Ω 100nF 680Ω 3 Type7 China seimence tel 160Ω 150nF 1100Ω 4 Type 8 Brazil 900Ω 5 Type 9 600Ω Line loss 10dB 6 Type 10 Reserved 7 Type 11 Reserved 8 Type 12 ...

Page 767: ...he tone These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in Items 1 and 2 see below In this program you assign the two Frequency Numbers and Modulation for each Type for each of the four Ranges The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type in each Range Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 01 Incoming Ring Tone Level MF Input Data Incoming Ringing...

Page 768: ... Incoming High Mid Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 5 Intercom Incoming Pattern High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 6 Alarm Sensor Pattern High Mid Low 760 760 760 760 760 760 No Modulation No Modulation No Modulation Pattern 7 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 1400 760 660 540 540 540 16Hz Modulat...

Page 769: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 729 Feature Cross Reference Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Selectable Ring Tones ...

Page 770: ...tions on a DSS console LED Pattern 0 OFF LED Pattern 1 FL On 500ms Off 500ms LED Pattern 2 WK On 250ms Off 250ms LED Pattern 3 RW On 125ms Off 125ms Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 03 DSS Console LED Pattern Setup Level MF Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Log In 0 7 1 02 Log Out 0 7 4 03 Emergency Call 0 7 3 On Off On Off On Off On Off ...

Page 771: ...ern 4 IR On 125ms Off 125ms On 125ms Off 625ms LED Pattern 5 IL On 875ms Off 125ms LED Pattern 6 IW On 625ms Off 125ms On 125ms Off 125ms LED Pattern 7 ON Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Station Selection DSS On Off On Off On Off On Off ...

Page 772: ...04 Maximum Break Time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 20 100ms 05 Minimum Make Time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 2 10ms 06 Maximum Make Time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 20 100ms 07 Minimum Hook Flash Time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 21 105ms 08 Maximum Hook Flash Time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 200 1000ms 09 Minimum Ground Flash Time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 21 105ms 10 Minimum Off Hook Time 1 255 5ms 1275ms 21 105ms 11 No Detection Time after Off Hook 1 255 5ms ...

Page 773: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 733 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 774: ... basic data for layer 2 of ISDN PRI S Point Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 05 ISDN BRI Layer 2 Initial Setup Level MF Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 T200 1 255 10 02 T201 1 255 10 03 T202 1 255 20 04 T203 1 255 30 05 N200 1 255 3 06 N201 1 65535 260 07 N202 1 255 3 ...

Page 775: ...6 ISDN BRI Layer 3 Timer Setup Level MF Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 T301 0 180 254 180 02 T302 1 254 10 03 T303 1 254 4 04 T304 0 255 20 05 T305 1 254 30 06 T306 0 254 30 07 T307 1 254 180 08 T308 1 254 4 09 T309 1 254 90 10 T310 0 180 30 11 T312 1 254 6 12 T313 1 254 4 13 T314 1 254 4 14 T316 2 254 120 15 T317 1 254 60 16 T318 1 254 4 17 T319 1 254 4 18 T320 1 254 30 19 T321 1 2...

Page 776: ...Issue 4 0 2 736 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 777: ...alue of the CODEC QSLAC filter of each analog port Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Direct Station Selection DSS Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 07 CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port Level IN Input Data Station Port Number 1 960 CODEC Filter Type Default 0 No filter 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 3 ...

Page 778: ...alog trunk Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 08 Sidetone Volume Setup Level MF Input Data Item No Description Input Digital Sidetone Level Analog Sidetone Level 01 Sidetone Volume 0 54 dB 54 dB 1 48 dB 54 dB 2 42 dB 54 dB 3 36 dB 48 dB 4 30 dB 42 dB 5 24 dB 36 dB 6 default 18 dB 30 dB...

Page 779: ...r Setup 3 0 255 191 04 B1 Filter Setup 4 0 255 44 05 B1 Filter Setup 5 0 255 90 06 B1 Filter Setup 6 0 255 165 07 B1 Filter Setup 7 0 255 168 08 B1 Filter Setup 8 0 255 123 09 B1 Filter Setup 9 0 255 159 10 B1 Filter Setup 10 0 255 185 11 B1 Filter Setup 11 0 255 246 12 B1 Filter Setup 12 0 255 159 13 B1 Filter Setup 13 0 255 201 14 B1 Filter Setup 14 0 255 240 15 B2 Filter Setup 1 0 255 221 16 B2...

Page 780: ...5 1 33 R Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 46 34 R Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 1 36 R Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 17 37 R Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 1 38 R Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 144 39 R Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 1 40 R Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 144 41 R Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 1 42 R Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 144 43 R Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 1 4...

Page 781: ...X Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 35 54 X Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 52 55 X Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 71 56 X Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 172 57 X Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 43 58 X Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 197 59 GR Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 66 60 GR Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 97 61 GX Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 162 62 GX Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 176 Input Data Continued Item Name I...

Page 782: ... None Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 14 Handset Headset Gain for Multiline Telephone Level IN Input Data Extension 1 960 Input Data Item No Item Description Input Default 01 Handset Transmit Gain Level The handset gain level is set for sending transmit 1 32 3 5dB 58 5dB 2dB basis 0 Fixed Value 12 5db 0 02 Headset Receive Gain Level The headset gain level is set for receiving hear...

Page 783: ...5 03 B1 Filter Setup 3 0 255 164 04 B1 Filter Setup 4 0 255 34 05 B1 Filter Setup 5 0 255 71 06 B1 Filter Setup 6 0 255 69 07 B1 Filter Setup 7 0 255 169 08 B1 Filter Setup 8 0 255 123 09 B1 Filter Setup 9 0 255 135 10 B1 Filter Setup 10 0 255 248 11 B1 Filter Setup 11 0 255 254 12 B1 Filter Setup 12 0 255 143 13 B1 Filter Setup 13 0 255 168 14 B1 Filter Setup 14 0 255 240 15 B2 Filter Setup 1 0 2...

Page 784: ... 208 33 R Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 46 34 R Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 1 36 R Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 17 37 R Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 1 38 R Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 144 39 R Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 1 40 R Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 144 41 R Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 1 42 R Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 144 43 R Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 1 ...

Page 785: ...0 255 1 54 X Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 144 55 X Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 1 56 X Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 144 57 X Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 1 58 X Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 144 59 GR Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 1 60 GR Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 17 61 GX Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 1 62 GX Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 144 Input Data Continued Item Name Input Data Default ...

Page 786: ...0 255 242 03 B1 Filter Setup 3 0 255 191 04 B1 Filter Setup 4 0 255 44 05 B1 Filter Setup 5 0 255 90 06 B1 Filter Setup 6 0 255 165 07 B1 Filter Setup 7 0 255 168 08 B1 Filter Setup 8 0 255 123 09 B1 Filter Setup 9 0 255 159 10 B1 Filter Setup 10 0 255 185 11 B1 Filter Setup 11 0 255 246 12 B1 Filter Setup 12 0 255 159 13 B1 Filter Setup 13 0 255 201 14 B1 Filter Setup 14 0 255 240 15 B2 Filter Se...

Page 787: ...ilter Coefficients 1 0 255 46 34 R Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 1 35 R Filter Coefficients 3 0 255 1 36 R Filter Coefficients 4 0 255 17 37 R Filter Coefficients 5 0 255 1 38 R Filter Coefficients 6 0 255 144 39 R Filter Coefficients 7 0 255 1 40 R Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 144 41 R Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 1 42 R Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 144 43 R Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 1 44 R Filter...

Page 788: ...ients 7 0 255 35 54 X Filter Coefficients 8 0 255 52 55 X Filter Coefficients 9 0 255 71 56 X Filter Coefficients 10 0 255 172 57 X Filter Coefficients 11 0 255 43 58 X Filter Coefficients 12 0 255 197 59 GR Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 66 60 GR Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 97 61 GX Filter Coefficients 1 0 255 162 62 GX Filter Coefficients 2 0 255 176 Input Data Continued Item Name Input Data Defaul...

Page 789: ...type Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension 82 17 CODEC Filter Option Data Type Setup Level IN Input Data Line Type 1 SLIU 2 OPX 3 SLI Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Option Type 0 None 1 Type 5 2 Type 6 3 Type 7 4 Type 8 5 Type 9 6 Type 10 7 Type 11 8 Type 12 9 Type 13 10 Type 14 11 Type 15 0 ...

Page 790: ...Issue 4 0 2 750 Program 82 Basic Hardware Setup for Extension ...

Page 791: ... Enable 0 04 G 711 Type 0 A law 1 law 1 05 Number of G 729 audio frames 1 6 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 5 50ms 6 60ms 3 06 G 729 VAD mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 07 G 729 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 08 G 729 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 15 Jitter Buffer Mode Self adjusting silent period is not valid by IPLE If this value is set the system will operate as Se...

Page 792: ...EC setting Priority of voice encoding method 0 3 0 G 711 2 G 729 3 G 722 0 63 Number of G 722 audio frames 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 3 65 G 722 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 66 G 722 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 67 G 722 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 68 RTP Filter To avoid incorrect voice pass connection this Program checks the sending side address from received RTP packet at VoIPDB 0 Dis...

Page 793: ...9 05 H 225 Call Proceeding Timer 0 255sec 10 07 H 245 Master Slave Determination Timer 0 255sec 5 08 H 245 Master Slave Determination Retry Count 0 255sec 3 09 H 245 Capability Exchange Timer 0 255sec 5 10 H 245 Logical Channel Establishment Timer 0 255sec 50 11 H 245 Mode Request Procedures Timer 0 255sec 50 12 H 245 Close Logical Channel Timer 0 255sec 50 13 H 245 Round Trip Delay Timer 0 255sec...

Page 794: ...55sec 5 26 IRR Retry Count 0 255 2 27 RAS DRQ Timer 0 255sec 8 28 DRQ Retry Count 0 255 2 29 RAS LRQ Timer 0 255sec 5 30 LRQ Retry Count 0 255 2 31 RAS RAI Timer 0 255sec 3 32 RAI Retry Count 0 255 2 33 Call Signaling Port Number 0 65535 0 1719 1721 65535 1730 35 Fast Start Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 36 RAS Unicast Port Number 0 65535 20001 37 Terminal Type setting 0 255 60 Input Data Continued Ite...

Page 795: ...534 10020 02 RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 10021 It has to be RTP Port Number 1 04 Fract Lost Threshold 0 100 0 The data is sent to the GCD CP10 if the value exceeds the defined value 05 Packets Lost Threshold 0 16777215 0 The data is sent to the GCD CP10 if the value exceeds the defined value 07 Jitter Threshold 0 4294967295 sec 0 The data is sent to the GCD CP10 if the value exceeds the def...

Page 796: ...es Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP 84 07 Firmware Download Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Server Mode 0 TFTP 1 FTP 0 02 File Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 1 1 223 255 254 254 0 0 0 0 03 Login Name Up to 20 Characters None 04 Password Up to 20 Characters None ...

Page 797: ...ns System programming must be exited before these program options take affect Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP 84 09 VLAN Setup Level IN Input Data Ethernet Interface 1 CPU 2 IPLA Item No Item Input Data Default 01 VLAN 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On 0 02 VLAN ID 1 4094 0 03 Priority 0 7 0 ...

Page 798: ...Disable Invalid 1 IP Precedence 2 Diffserv 0 When Input Data is set to 1 Item No 07 is invalid When Data is set to 2 Item No 02 06 are invalid 02 Priority IP Precedence 0 7 0 Low 7 High 0 1 Router queuing priority 03 Low Delay 0 1 0 Normal Delay Low Delay 0 1 Optimize for low delay routing 04 Wideband Throughout 0 1 0 Normal Throughput 1 High Throughput 0 1 Optimize for high bandwidth routing 05 H...

Page 799: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 759 Conditions The system must be reset for these program options to take affect Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP ...

Page 800: ... G 711 VAD mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 03 G 711 Type 0 A law 1 law 1 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 07 Number of G 729 Audio Frames 1 6 3 08 G 729 VAD mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 10 G 729 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 11 G 729 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 17 Jitter Buffer M...

Page 801: ...ty 0 G 711_PT 2 G 729_PT 3 G 722_PT 0 35 G 722 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 36 G 722 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 37 G 722 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 38 RTP Filter To avoid incorrect voice pass connection this Program checks the sending side address from received RTP packet at VoIPDB 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 802: ...f G 711 Audio Frames 1 4 1 10ms 4 40ms 2 02 G 711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 03 G 711 Type 0 A law 1 law 1 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 20 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 40 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 80 07 Number of G 729 Audio Frames 1 6 1 10ms 6 60ms 2 08 G 729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 20 1...

Page 803: ...uffer min 0 300ms 30 36 G 722 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 37 G 722 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 38 Number of G 726 Audio Frames 1 4 1 10ms 4 40ms 3 39 G 726 VAD Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 40 G 726 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 41 G 726 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 42 G 726 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 49 RTP Filter To avoid incorrect voice pass connection this Program checks the sending s...

Page 804: ... PRG 15 03 03 PRG 15 03 18 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 67 VBD Payload Setup the Payload Type number when using VBD 96 127 97 70 Video Quality Mode This program is not supported for version 1 00 software and will be supported in a later release This program specifies the SIP trunk video quality mode Use this program in conjunction with 84 27 20 for Mode 1 and 84 27 21 for Mode 2 video quality settings Mod...

Page 805: ...nimum value of jitter buffer for the video stream This value must be smaller than the value of the maximum jitter buffer This value should only be changed for if needed for highly congested networks 0 1000ms 70ms 74 Initial Jitter Buffer for Video This program is not supported for version 1 00 software and will be supported in a later release This program sets the initial value of jitter buffer fo...

Page 806: ...e supported in a later release This program sets the maximum value of jitter buffer for the video stream It is used only when 84 19 72 Jitter Buffer Mode for video is set to 1 Fixed This value must be bigger than the value of the minimum jitter buffer and should only be changed if needed for highly congested networks 0 1000ms 210ms Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default Profile 1 6 ...

Page 807: ...5092 Profile 5 5094 Profile 6 5096 With Version 2000 or lower CPU Software only two SIP Profiles are supported 07 Session Timer Value 1 65535 0 08 Minimum Session Timer Value 1 65535 1800 09 Called Party Information 0 Request URI 1 To Header 0 10 URL Type 0 SIP URL 1 TEL URL 0 11 URL To HeaderSetting Information 0 If 10 29 12 and 10 29 13 are set for the Proxy server domain the value is put The va...

Page 808: ...hen set to 0 the 101rel is included in the supported header of the invite message When set to 1 the 101rel is NOT included in the supported header of the invite message Inbound Call When set to 0 and the Invite includes a 101rel in the supported header of the invite message the provisional 1XX excluding the 100 Trying Will contain a 100rel in the supported header which means the other side must PR...

Page 809: ...bled 1 302 Return 0 18 Keep Alive by OPTION Interval Timer 60 3600 180sec 19 Keep Alive by OPTION Fail Limit 1 5 1 20 Option Keep Alive User ID Only single byte alphanumeric characters are allowed ping 21 SIP Trunk TLS Port Number 1 65535 Profile 1 5061 Profile 2 5063 Profile 3 5091 Profile 4 5093 Profile 5 5095 Profile 6 5097 22 TLS Certificate Up to 32 characters No Setting Input Data Continued ...

Page 810: ...a Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Registration Information Automatic Deletion When set to 1 the registration information is automatically deleted for H 323 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 Keep Alive Message Interval Time interval that system sends a Ping to the terminal 1 10 minutes 1 03 Keep Alive Message Timeout Time that system waits for a Ping response from the terminal 1 10 seconds 5 04 Keep Alive...

Page 811: ...of IP PCM This option adds gain to the voice input from the LAN and removes it from the voice output to highway 0 30 15dBm 15dBm 0 15dBm 1 14dBm 15 0dBm 29 14dBm 30 15dBm 15 0dBm 02 TX Limiter Control Gain Gain setting to control limiter in the direction of PCM IP This option adds the gain to the voice input from highway and removes it from the voice output to the LAN 15 0dBm 03 RX Limiter Control...

Page 812: ...r of G 711 Audio Frames 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 2 02 G 711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 03 G 711 Type 0 A law 1 law 1 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 20 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 40 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 80 07 Number of G 729 Audio Frames 1 6 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 5 50ms 6 60ms 2 08 G 729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disabled 1 ...

Page 813: ...er Buffer average 0 300ms 60 37 G 722 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 38 Number of G 726 Audio Frames 1 4 1 10ms 4 40ms 3 39 G 726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 40 G 726 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 41 G 726 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 42 G 726 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 44 iLBC Voice Activity Detection Mode Not used by IPLE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 49 RTP Filter To avoid ...

Page 814: ... to self adjusting and should only be changed when directed by support 1 Static 2 Self Adjusting 2 68 Minimum Jitter Buffer for Video This program sets the minimum value of jitter buffer for the video stream This value must be smaller than the value of the maximum jitter buffer This value should only be changed for if needed highly congested networks 0 1000ms 70ms 69 Initial Jitter Buffer for Vide...

Page 815: ...s the maximum value of jitter buffer for the video stream It is used only when 84 19 72 Jitter Buffer Mode for video is set to 1 Fixed This value must be bigger than the value of the minimum jitter buffer and should only be changed if needed for highly congested networks 0 1000ms 210ms Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 816: ...4 Hardware Setup for VoIP 84 20 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Level IN Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Registrar Proxy Port 1 65535 5070 02 Session Timer Value 0 65535 180 03 Minimum Session Timer Value 0 65535 180 04 Called Party Info 0 Request URI 1 To Header 0 05 Expire Value of Invite Arrival of a message is ended when this time expires and there is no cut from the caller 0 256 seco...

Page 817: ...711 Audio Frames 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 3 02 G 711 Type 0 A law 1 law 1 03 G 711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 07 G 729 Audio Frame Number 1 6 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 5 50ms 6 60ms 3 08 G 729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 G...

Page 818: ... 30 10dBm 20dBm 20 27 G 722 Audio Frame Number 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 3 28 G 722 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 29 G 722 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 30 G 722 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 31 G 722 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 32 G 726 Audio Frame Number 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 3 33 G 726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 34 G 726 Jitte...

Page 819: ...ture Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP 43 RTP Filter To avoid incorrect voice pass connection this Program checks the sending side address from received RTP packet at VoIPDB 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 820: ...pport numerical user IDs not alphanumeric Up to 16 characters No Setting 03 User ID Omission Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again 0 Off 1 On 0 04 Log Off When the registration mode 10 46 01 is set to manual and the phone prompts for a login the previous user ID appears so the user only has to enter the password When enabled the extension assigned to the Personal ID I...

Page 821: ...Manual 2 781 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP 05 Nick Name Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again Up to 32 characters No Setting Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 822: ...r DT700 terminal is connected or not 60 65535 sec 180 02 Subscribe Expire Timer The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and receive the terminal operation instructions between the Main Device and DT700 terminal 60 65535 sec 3600 03 Session Expire Timer Set effective time for supervising the Voice Path 60 65535 sec 180 04 Minimum Session Expire Timer Set minimum value of effective time for supervisi...

Page 823: ...09 Temporary Password Read Only 10 Number of Password Retries Input the number of times an incorrect password can be entered when the security key is pressed 0 255 0 11 Password Lock Time 0 120 0 12 Reference Number Up to 32 digits 0 9 P R No Setting 13 Media Type of Service 0x00 0xFF 0 9 A F 00 14 Refer Expire Timer 0 65535 sec 60 Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 824: ...5 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Number of G 711 Audio Frames Input the amount of audio in the packets when using the G 711 CODEC 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 2 02 G 711 Voice Activity Detection 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 03 G 711 Type This decides the G 711 type In North America typically u law is used 0 A law 1 law 1 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 20 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 4...

Page 825: ...available via telephone programming 40 70 70 25 Echo Canceler 4W DET not available via telephone programming 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 28 Audio Capability Priority 0 3 0 G 711_PT 2 G 729_PT 3 G 722_PT 0 32 G 722 Audio Frame Number 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 3 34 G 722 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 35 G 722 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 36 G 722 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 37 RTP Filter To avoi...

Page 826: ...Issue 4 0 2 786 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP ...

Page 827: ... 4 40ms 3 02 G 711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 03 G 711 Type 0 A law 1 law 1 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 07 Number of G 729 Audio Frames 1 6 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 5 50ms 6 60ms 3 08 G 729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 10 ...

Page 828: ... 0 300ms 30 36 G 722 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 37 G 722 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 38 Number of G 726 Audio Frames 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 3 39 G 726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 40 G 726 Jitter Buffer min 0 300ms 30 41 G 726 Jitter Buffer average 0 300ms 60 42 G 726 Jitter Buffer max 0 300ms 120 49 RTP Filter To avoid incorrect voice pass connection this ...

Page 829: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 789 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP ...

Page 830: ...for VoIP 84 26 IPL Basic Setup Level IN Input Data Slot Number 1 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 IP Address xxx xxx xxx xxx Slot 1 172 16 0 20 02 RTP Port Number 0 65534 VoIP GW1 10020 03 RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 0 65534 VoIP GW1 10021 12 Video RTP Port Sets the starting RTP port used by standard SIP terminal video 0 65534 20020 13 Video RTCP Port Sets the starting RTCP port used by s...

Page 831: ...Data Slot Number 1 Item No Item Input Data Default 03 SRTP Mode Setup 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 04 SRTP Mode Select 0 Mode1 0 06 H 245 Port Number 0 65535 10100 07 Preparation Completion Response Port Number 0 65535 4000 14 ICMP Redirect 0 Enable 1 Disable 0 Voice Packets WILL follow ICMP redirect messages 1 Voice Packets WILL NOT follow ICMP redirect messages For Signaling packets and ICMP refer to PR...

Page 832: ... VoIP DSP resources to reserve for non MCU mode 2 video This program is used if peer to peer is disabled for standard SIP phones VoIP DSP resources are shared between video and voice calls The system will always keep 64 resources for voice calls When changing this program if resources are exceeded the system will provide an error message and will not allow the setting to be changed 0 6 0 22 Maximu...

Page 833: ...ke affect This setting reserves VoIP DSP resources for mode 2 video conferences When a DSP resource is reserved it is not available for SIP voice calls VoIP DSP resources are shared between video and voice calls The system will always keep 64 resources for voice calls When changing this program if resources are exceeded the system will provide an error message and will not allow the setting to be ...

Page 834: ...IP Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP 84 28 DT800 DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup Level IN Index 1 Terminal Type 1 ITL E 1D IP E 1 2 ITL D 1D ITL 24BT1D ITL 24PA 1D 3 ITL 320C 1 4 Not used 5 ITL DG 3 6 ITL CG 3 7 ITL 2CR 1 8 ITZ D D ITZ PD D ITZ pA D ITZ DG ITZ LDG ITZ LD 9 ITZ CG 10 ITY 6D 11 ITY 8LDX Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Firmware Directory Maximum 64 characters No Setting 02 Fi...

Page 835: ...e Setup for VoIP 84 29 DT800 DT700 CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup Level IN Input Data Type 1 Type 1 Multicast 2 Type 2 reserved 3 Type 3 reserved 4 Type 4 reserved 5 Type 5 reserved Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Audio Capability 1 G 711 A law 2 G 711 law 3 G 729 5 G 722 2 02 Number of Audio Frames 1 6 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 5 50ms 6 60ms 2 03 RTP Filter To avoid incorrect voice pass ...

Page 836: ...ber of G 711 Audio Frames 1 2 1 20ms 2 30ms 2 02 G 711 Type 0 A law 1 law 1 03 G 711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 04 G 711 Jitter Buffer min 0 160ms 30 05 G 711 Jitter Buffer average 0 160ms 60 06 G 711 Jitter Buffer max 0 160ms 120 07 Number of G 729 Audio Frames 1 3 1 20ms 2 30ms 3 40ms 2 08 G 729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 09 G 729 Jitter Buffer min...

Page 837: ... Audio Capability 1 21 DTMF Relay Mode 0 Disable 1 Inbound RFC2833 2 Outbound H 245 0 22 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 Static 2 Adaptive during silence 3 Adaptive immediate 3 23 Voice Activity Detection Threshold 0 30 19dB 10dB 0 Self adjustment 1 19dB 49dBm 20 0dB 30dBm 29 9dB 21dBm 30 10dB 20dBm 20 24 Echo Canceler Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 25 Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 26 LDP Check Sum ...

Page 838: ...Issue 4 0 2 798 Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP Conditions PVA CCIS CODEC changes require a reset of the GCD PVAA blade Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 839: ... Profile 1 6 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 TDM Echo Canceler Mode Select echo Canceler on off at receiving TDM side 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 02 TDM Echo Canceler NLP Mode 2W Select Echo Compression Mode for remaining echo Effective when 84 31 01 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 03 TDM Echo Canceler Comfort Noise Mode Normally not used Select comfort noise as background noise Effective when 84 31...

Page 840: ...canceler type 1 Based upon ITU T G 168 2 Based upon ITU T G 167 Effective when 84 31 01 1 1 Line Echo Canceler 2 Acoustic Echo Canceler 1 10 TDM TX Level Control Select transmit level control mode 0 Disable 1 TX Control Mode 2 TX Automatic Level Control Mode 3 TX HLC High Level 3 11 TDM TX Voice Level Control Mode Effective when 84 31 10 1 0 16 24 24 0 24dB 1 21dB 8 0dB 15 21dB 16 24dB 8 12 TDM TX...

Page 841: ...l Normally not used Select receive level control mode 0 Disable 1 RX Level Control Mode 2 RX Automatic Level Control Flag 0 17 TDM RX Level Control Level Normally not used Select receive voice level Effective when 84 31 16 1 0 16 24 24 0 24dB 1 21dB 8 0dB 15 21dB 16 24dB 8 18 TDM RX Automatic Level Control Level Normally not used Select target gain Effective when 84 31 16 2 0 12 42 6 0 42dBm 1 39d...

Page 842: ...onditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP 37 TDM Echo Canceler NLP Mode 4W Select Echo Compression Mode for remaining echo Effective when 84 31 19 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 843: ...NetLink Item No Item Input Data Default Profile 1 6 01 FAX Relay Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Each Port Mode 0 02 T 38 Protocol Mode 0 R U 1 U R 2 RTP 3 UDPTL 1 04 Jitter Buffer max 0 300 160 05 T 38 RTP Format Payload Number 96 127 100 06 T 38 Fax Maximum Speed 0 V 27ter 4800bps 1 V 29 9600bps 2 V 17 14400bps 2 07 T 38 Data Error Correction Mode 0 Redundancy 1 FEC 0 08 T 38 Error protection depth fo...

Page 844: ...ffer 0 300 80 16 Average Jitter Buffer 0 300 120 17 Maximum Jitter Buffer 0 300 160 18 FAX RTP Payload Type 0 2 8 96 127 103 19 FAX over IP Type 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 When SIP Trunk is used Type 1 T 38 Type 2 Path through When CCIS is used Type 1 SV9100 Original Mode Select Type 1 Mode when networked between the SV9100 system only Type 2 PBX Compatible Mode Select Type 2 Mode when the PBX SV9300 SV950...

Page 845: ...col VoIP Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP 84 34 VoIPDB DTMF Setup Level IN Input Data Type 1 H 323 Trunk 2 Networking 3 SIP Trunk 4 SIP Extension 5 CCIS over IP 6 NetLink Item No Item Input Data Default Profile 1 6 01 DTFMF Relay Mode 0 Disable 1 RFC2833 2 H 245 0 02 DTMF Payload Number 96 127 110 03 DTMF Detection Type 1 5 1 04 DTMF Transmit Type 1 5 1 05 DTMF Relay inband Retransmit Type 1 5 1...

Page 846: ...IP Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP 84 35 VoIPDB RFC2833 Playout Setup Level IN Input Data Type 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 RFC2833 Playout Level 0 Depends on RFC2833 1 Configuration 0 02 RFC2833 Playout Level High 1 33dBm 28 6dBm 28 03 RFC2833 Playout Level Low 1 33dBm 28 6dBm 28 04 RFC2833 Playout Transmit Duration 0 Depends on RFC2833 25 200...

Page 847: ...rnet Protocol VoIP Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP 84 36 VoIPDB DTMF Transmit Setup Level IN Input Data Type 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 DTMF Transmit Level 1 61 36dB 24dB 1 36dB 2 35dB 37 0dB 60 23dB 61 24dB 25 12dB 02 DTMF Transmit Duration 30 2000ms 100 03 DTMF Transmit Twist Level 1 49 24dB 24dB 1 24dB 2 23dB 25 0dB 48 23dB 49 24dB 25 ...

Page 848: ...etup for VoIP 84 37 VoIPDB DTMF Detection Setup Level IN Index 1 Type 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 DTMF Detection Minimum Level 0 31 40dB 9dB 0 40dB 1 39dB 2 38dB 31 9dB 2 38dB 02 DTMF Detect Twist Positive Level 0 24dB 5 03 DTMF Detect Twist Negative Level 0 24dB 0 04 DTMF Detect Minimum Duration 23 2000ms 30 05 DTMF Transmit Twist Level 0 9 9dB ...

Page 849: ...nput Data Type 1 H 323 Trunk 2 Networking 3 SIP Trunk 4 SIP Extension 5 CCIS over IP 6 NetLink 7 DT800 DT700 Item No Item Input Data Default Profile 1 6 01 Echo Canceler Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 02 Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 03 Echo Canceler Comfort Noise Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 04 Not Used 05 Echo Canceler Tail Displacement 0 87 0ms 870ms 0 06 Echo Canceler Tail Length 1 32ms ...

Page 850: ...l 2 Auto 3 HLC 0 11 TX Level Control Level 0 16 24dB 24dB 0 24dB 1 21dB 2 18dB 8 0dB 14 18dB 15 21dB 16 24dB 8 12 TX Automatic Level Control Level 0 12 42dBm 6dBm 0 42dBmm 1 39dBm 7 21dBm 11 9dBm 12 6dBm 7 13 TX HLC Threshold 0 42 42dBm 0dBm 0 42dBmm 1 41dBm 42 0dBm 41 14 TX Signal Limiter Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 15 TX Signal Limiter Threshold 0 42 42dBm 0dBm 0 42dBmm 1 41dBm 42 0dBm 41 Item No ...

Page 851: ...rnet Protocol VoIP 16 RX Level Control 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Auto 0 17 RX Level Control Level 0 16 24dB 24dB 0 24dB 1 21dB 2 18dB 8 0dB 14 18dB 15 21dB 16 24dB 8 18 RX Automatic Level Control Level 0 12 42dBm 6dBm 0 42dBmm 1 39dBm 7 21dBm 11 9dBm 12 6dBm 7 Item No Item Input Data Default Profile 1 6 ...

Page 852: ... Customization to observe SIP Trunk information This program is Read Only Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Program 84 Hardware Setup for VoIP 84 39 SIP Trunk Message Customization Level IN Item No Item Input Data Default Profile 1 6 01 99 Options 1 99 0 255 0 ...

Page 853: ... Date to define the installation date of the system Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 01 Installation Date Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Year 00 99 00 No Setting 02 Month 01 12 00 No Setting 03 Day 01 31 00 No Setting ...

Page 854: ...ription heading is the program access level You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires SA level password can access to SA or SB programs and SB level password can access to SB programs only Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 02 Programming Password Setup Level IN CAUTION Before changing your numbering plan use the PC Programming or WebPro Progr...

Page 855: ... 47544 1 MF Manufacturer Level Access to all system programs 2 tech 12345678 2 IN Installer Level Access to all IN level programs 3 ADMIN1 0000 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 Restricted Access 4 ADMIN2 9999 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 More Restricted Access 5 USER1 1111 5 UA User Programming Level 1 6 5 UA User Programming Level 1 7 5 UA User Programming Level 1 8 5 UA User Programming Le...

Page 856: ...fore all uploaded programming takes affect Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 03 Save Data Level SA NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Item No Item Input Data 01 Data Save Dial 1 press Transfer Press Transfer to cancel 02 DIM Log Save Dial 1 press Transfer to copy DIM log from SD Drive to USB drive 03 ...

Page 857: ...ystem and wait a few minutes for the system to reset completely before accessing any line or special system feature Otherwise some unusual LED indications may be experienced Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 04 Load Data Level SA NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Item No Item Input Data 01 Load Data Dial 1 pres...

Page 858: ...rface blade Reset allows you to send a reset code Conditions When you delete or reset a blade you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90 05 When reusing the slot for another blade you must plug the blade in or reset the system before the system can use the slot again When you delete or reset a blade all related programming in Program 10 03 01 is set back to default Program 90 Maint...

Page 859: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 819 Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 860: ...t none of the ports on the blade can be used for new calls Existing calls however are not affected Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 06 Trunk Control Level SA NOTE This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro but not through PC Programming Input Data Menu Number 0 Set Busy Out 1 Reset Busy Out idle Item No Item Input Data 01 Trunk Cont...

Page 861: ...ce Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 07 Station Control Level SA NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Menu Number 1 Hardware Reset 2 Software Reset Item No Item Input Data 01 Extension Control 001 960 ...

Page 862: ...et using Program 90 08 or by powering down powering up before all the restored programming takes affect Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 08 System Reset Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Item No Item Input Data 01 System Reset Dial 1 press Transfer Press Transfer key to cancel ...

Page 863: ... Program 90 09 Automatic System Reset Time Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Month 00 12 Note 1 00 02 Day 00 31 Note 2 00 03 Hour 00 23 00 04 Minute 00 59 00 Note 1 If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set the system is automatically reset every month on the predefined day Note 2 If the Day is set to 00 and the Time Hour and Minute is set the system automatically resets ...

Page 864: ...ery Alarm Status 1 2 0 PKG Initialize Error 1 The PKG failed to initialize 2 The PKG did not start normally 1 PKG not inserted firmly 2 PKG was removed but not reinserted firmly 3 Old PKG data still reported due to no initialization 1 Insert PKG firmly 2 Insert PKG firmly 3 Delete slot information in PRG 90 05 and insert the PKG again During initialization the PKG is recognized ERR REC 2 2 0 PKG M...

Page 865: ...pment by which you seem may generate the radiation noise 5 Ground the chassis correctly When unit is confirmed the error is recovered ERR REC 4 2 0 PKG S W Download Error The unit program could not be downloaded normally The unit could not be started normally 1 The package software is not stored in the downloaded USB memory 2 The stored package software is illegal Package information that was inst...

Page 866: ...rs again When the commercial power is restored the error is recovered ERR REC 8 1 0 RAM Backup Battery Error RAM backup battery on the GCD CP10 blade is unplugged or defective Check the battery connector If it is connected correctly replace the battery The error is recovered once the battery is replaced ERR REC 9 Reserved 10 0 0 ISDN Link Error Layer1 link of ISDN lines came off 1 Check connection...

Page 867: ...urns normally the error is recovered ERR REC 14 0 0 LAN Link Error The link with LAN on GCD CP10 came off 1 LAN cable defective 2 Connected HUB broken 3 Defective GCD CP10 Confirm the operation of LAN connector LAN cable and HUB again When the connection returns normally the error is recovered ERR REC 15 0 0 Network Keep Alive 1 The network connection has been cut 2 Network Keep Alive restoration ...

Page 868: ... 1 Confirm whether there is problem in wiring to connect a main device with PC 2 Execute the reactivation of PC When the output is restarted the error is recovered However the SMDR data after the error occurs is not recorded ERR REC 31 1 0 Auto Dial after Sensor Detection Auto dialing occurs after sensor detection Sensor detect an abnormality and makes an emergency call No action needed 32 1 0 Rem...

Page 869: ...h CS 4 Hard defect of CS 5 Hard defect of CSIU Confirm the following when it happens frequently during operation 1 Confirm CS is normally connected 2 Confirm the wiring between CSIU CS is normal 3 Exchange CS 4 Exchange CSIU This error has been recovered when it is notified ERR REC 38 0 0 CSIU Dch Error It was restored automatically specifying reset to concerned CS with a main device because a mai...

Page 870: ... avail space gets below 10 Have users remove stored messages or if needed use InMail Utility to reinitialize CF back to factory default This error can be recovered when avail space on VRS InMail CF is back above 3 or 10 depending on alarm level setting 53 0 0 Reserved 54 2 0 License Management Table Full A new TCP IP terminal and the DSP board were not able to be added to the application license m...

Page 871: ...ddress or Port 03 Caller ID does not match 10 Cannot get IP Address 11 Socket Open Error 12 Socket Port Setting Error 13 TCP Session Timeout 59 Reserved 60 2 0 SIP Registration Error Notification 1 The registration of the SIP trunk to the SIP server failed 2 The registration of the SIP trunk to the SIP server failed in the authentication 3 There is no response from the SIP server to the SIP regist...

Page 872: ...tive 2 Connected HUB broken 3 Defective GCD CP10 1 Confirm LAN connector and wiring 2 Check with maker on uncertain points When the connection returns normally the error is recovered ERR REC 65 0 0 VoIPDB trouble information When DSP of VoIPDB notifies Error GPZ IPLE defective 1 Possibility of defective hardware 2 Check with maker on uncertain points WAR 66 2 0 SIP extension License Error More tha...

Page 873: ...ate Server a and b The certificate of PRG 84 14 22 is not yet valid or is expired or the certificate received from SIP server is not yet valid or is expired c The certificate received from SIP server is Self Signed certificate and same certificate is not set at PRG 84 14 22 d Can t prove server with using a certificate of PRG 84 14 22 1 ERR REC 2 WAR 3 WAR 4 WAR 5 WAR 75 Reserved 76 SIP Server Kee...

Page 874: ...se is insufficient Memory shortage 1 System ID Repeated 2 SystemID is illegal 3 The number of licenses is wrong 4 Insufficient system memory 1 Confirm the setting and license information on SystemID 2 Check with maker on uncertain points WAR 86 2 0 Data base replication fail Because the versions of DB is different replication cannot be executed between Primary and Secondary The versions of data ba...

Page 875: ...on failure Because Secondary is in programming mode the replication of DB cannot be executed Logging in with Secondary in the Web Pro or the PC Pro is possibly the cause Log out from Secondary programming mode WAR 96 1 0 Data base recovery fail Error happened when DataBase recovery operation Backup Restore Lack of resource Memory protected area recovery data file corruption are possible reasons fo...

Page 876: ...Issue 4 0 2 836 Program 90 Maintenance Program Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 877: ...t Number When alarm reports are e mailed set the SMTP host port number Contact your ISP Internet service provider for the correct entry if needed 0 65535 25 08 To E mail Address When alarm reports are e mailed set this e mail address to where the report should be sent Up to 255 Characters No Setting 09 Reply Address When alarm reports are e mailed set the e mail address where replies should be e m...

Page 878: ...Setting 14 Change SMTP Client When enabled the system uses the programs in 47 18 xx for email server integration 0 Off 1 On 0 15 DIMLOG Notification When enabled the system will send an email notification when a system fault occurs and DIMLast DIMDump files are generated If PRG 90 11 14 is also enabled the logs files will be attached to the email 0 Off 1 On 0 Input Data Continued Item No Item Inpu...

Page 879: ...sed as the output for system alarm report and set the system alarm options The system can have up to 50 reports Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 12 System Alarm Output Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Port Type Indicate the type of connection used for the System Alarms 0 No Setting 1 GCD CP10 0 ...

Page 880: ...enance Program 90 13 System Information Output Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection used to print the system information 0 No Setting 1 3 Reserved 4 Not used 5 USB Memory 0 04 Output Destination System ID 0 50 0 05 Output Command Dial 1 pre...

Page 881: ... of system programming by pressing Feature and the 3 key on any multiline terminal Conditions This Program is Read Only Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 16 Main Software Information Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Component 01 Version Number at present format is 1 XX XX e g 1 49 36 ASCII Code 5 Bytes 02 Software Release Date May 22 2002 17 53 46 ASCII Code...

Page 882: ...tion to display the firmware versions of the various system blades Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 17 Firmware Information Level IN Input Data Item No Item Display Data Data Format 01 DSP Firmware Version No 00 00 00 00 15 15 15 15 BCD Code 2 Byte ...

Page 883: ...lease the extension is released from the Dial Block restriction Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Code Restriction Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 19 Dial Block Release Level SA Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Item Input Data 01 Dial Block Release Release Dial 1 press Transfer Press Transfer to cancel ...

Page 884: ...Report when the data reaches the defined value 0 04 DTMF Receiver Busy Output 0 Not Detected 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined value 0 05 Dial Tone Detector Busy Output 0 Not Detected 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined value 0 06 Caller ID Receiver Busy Output 0 Not Detected 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined value 0 07 Voice Mail Channel All Busy Output 0 Not ...

Page 885: ...e 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 845 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Traffic Reports 11 Security Sensor Dial Record 0 Not Recorded 1 Recorded 0 Input Data Continued Item No Item Input Data Default ...

Page 886: ...Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic report output Conditions None Feature Cross Reference Traffic Reports Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 21 Traffic Report Output Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Output Port Type 0 No Setting 3 LAN 0 ...

Page 887: ...t Protocol VoIP Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 23 Deleting Registration of IP Telephones Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Extension Number 001 960 Item No Item Input Data 01 Delete IP Telephone This assignment removes the station number association with the MAC address of the IP station Delete Dial 1 press Transfer ...

Page 888: ...set the date and time for the alarm report to print Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 24 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Level IN Input Data Notification Number 1 12 Item No Item Input Data Defaul t 01 Month 00 12 00 02 Day 00 31 00 03 Hour 00 23 00 04 Minute 00 59 00 ...

Page 889: ...to define the mail address to receive the system alarm report CC Mail setup Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 25 System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup Level IN Input Data CC Number 1 5 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 CC Mail Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting ...

Page 890: ... Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 26 Program Access Level Setup Level IN Input Data Program Numbers 1001 9903 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Maintenance Level 1 MF Level 2 IN Level 3 SA Level 4 SB Level Refer to the Level indication for each individual program located in the upper left corner at the beginning of each program ...

Page 891: ...ord Setup to set the password used to enter the user programming mode Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 28 User Programming Password Setup Level IN Input Data Extension Numbers 001 960 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Password Fixed four digits 1111 ...

Page 892: ...ser name and password DIM is a maintenance tool used by engineering to extract trace level information Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 31 DIM Access over Ethernet Level IN Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Access Enabling 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Disable 02 Username 20 characters alphanumeric SV9100 03 Password 20 characters alphanumeric 12345678 ...

Page 893: ...intenance Program 90 34 Firmware Information Level IN Input Data Slot No 1 24 Item No Item Display Data 01 Pkg Name PKG Name 02 Firmware Version Number 00 00 0F FF 03 VoIPDB Version Used only for GPZ IPLE DEV PR REL 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF 04 DSP Project Number Used only for GPZ IPLE 00000000 FFFFFFFF 05 Vocallo F W Version Used only for GPZ IPLE 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF 06 OCT1010ID Version ...

Page 894: ...ions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 35 Wizard Programming Level Setup Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Wizard Number 1 250 Item No Item Display Data Default 01 Maintenance Level 0 All 3 SB System Administrator B 4 SA System Administrator A 5 IN 6 MF 0 ...

Page 895: ...owing firmware is available to update with this feature main bin Dspdbu bin dsp bin Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 36 Firmware Update Time Setting Level IN Input Data Item No Item Display Data 01 Firmware Update Schedule Time Year 0 99 Month 0 12 Day 00 31 Hour 00 23 Minute 00 59 02 Update mode 0 Non Active 1 Activated 03 Update Report 256 characters max ...

Page 896: ...s Reference None Sample Report Result Report Display Update Success Update is successful with the Update Time Update Fail Update failed Drive A Compact Flash was not available Update Fail Update failed The file main up does not exist on drive A Update Fail Update failed The scheduled time has expired ...

Page 897: ...ys of the temporary license Conditions Switch reset is required for changes to take effect Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 37 Set Temporary License Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Set Number of Days for Temporary License 00 10 days 00 Temporary license is invalid 0 ...

Page 898: ...tion 01 Time Setting 0 Off 1 On 1 02 Change of Music On Hold Tone 0 Off 1 On 1 03 Automatic Night Service Pattern 0 Off 1 On 1 04 Weekly Night Service Switching 0 Off 1 On 1 05 Text Data for Night Mode 0 Off 1 On 1 06 Holiday Night Service Switching 0 Off 1 On 1 07 DISA User ID Setup 0 Off 1 On 1 08 Mail Box Setup 0 Off 1 On 1 09 Text Messages Setup 0 Off 1 On 1 10 Incoming Ring Group Setup 0 Off ...

Page 899: ... Off 1 On 1 21 Internal Incoming Ring Tone PRG 15 02 03 0 Off 1 On 1 22 Display Language Selection PRG 15 02 01 0 Off 1 On 1 23 Toll Restriction Override Password PRG 21 07 0 Off 1 On 1 24 User Programming Password PRG 90 28 0 Off 1 On 1 25 Programmable Function Key PRG 15 07 0 Off 1 On 1 26 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment PRG 15 09 0 Off 1 On 1 27 One Touch Key Assignment PRG15 14 0 Off 1 On 1 ...

Page 900: ...Name PRG 22 11 03 0 Off 1 On 1 33 LCD Line Key Name Assignment PRG 15 20 0 Off 1 On 1 34 IntraMail Station Mailbox Options PRG 47 02 0 Off 1 On 1 35 UC User Information Setting PRG 20 57 0 Off 1 On 1 36 Setting the function key for BTH handset 0 Off 1 On 1 37 Multi Device Group Setup PRG 20 63 0 Off 1 On 1 38 Ten Key Backlit Control PRG 15 02 74 0 Off 1 On 1 Input Data Continued Item No Item Input...

Page 901: ... Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 39 Virtual Loop Back Port Reset Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Item No Item Input Data 01 Virtual Loop Back Reset Reset Dial 1 press Transfer Press Transfer to cancel ...

Page 902: ...ions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 41 Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data Level IN NOTE This program is available only through PC Programming and Web Pro Input Data Server Information 1 8 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Server Address Type 0 IPv4 1 IPv6 3 Fully Qualified Domain Name 0 02 Server Address IPv4 form xxx xxx xxx xxx IPv6 form xxxx xxxx ...

Page 903: ...gram 90 Maintenance Program 90 42 DT800 DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information Level IN Input Data Terminal Type 1 ITL E 1D IP E 1 2 ITL D 1D ITL 24BT 1D ITL 24PA 1D 3 ITL 320C 1 4 Not Used 5 ITL DG 3 6 ITL CG 3 7 ITL 2CR 1 8 ITZ D D ITZ PD D ITZ pA D ITZ DG ITZ LDG ITZ LD 9 ITZ CG 10 ITY 6D 11 ITY 8LDX Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Software Version 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 0...

Page 904: ...00 terminal Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 43 Deleting Terminal License of DT800 DT700 Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item No Item Input Data 01 Delete Terminal License Delete Dial 1 press Transfer Press Transfer to cancel ...

Page 905: ...interface Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 44 Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data License Delete Code 000 000 000 999 999 999 Item No Item Input Data 01 Delete Terminal License Delete Dial 1 press Transfer Press Transfer to cancel ...

Page 906: ...yption function Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 45 Temporary Password Change for DT800 DT700 Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Temporary Password Change Request 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF Change Yes 1 00 00 00 00 ...

Page 907: ...Telephone Level IN Input Data Extension Number 001 960 except virtual extension Item No Item Input Data 01 Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone Type A Key Kit 0 No Setting 1 Not Used 2 Type A for Overseas with Cursor Key 3 9 Not Used 10 Type A without Cursor Key Retrofit 11 12 Not Used Type B Key Kit 0 No Setting 1 Not Used 2 Type A for Overseas with Cursor Key 3 Type B with Cursor Key 4 ...

Page 908: ...ure Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 49 Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming and Web Pro Input Data Extension Number Up to eight digits Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Release Protection Mode Release Yes 1 None 02 Initialize Protection Password Initialize Yes 1 No...

Page 909: ...ay Setup to set the system alarm report display Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 50 System Alarm Display Setup Level IN Input Data Index Number 01 50 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 System Alarm Display Telephone Up to eight digits No setting ...

Page 910: ...s that need regular maintenance Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 51 Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange Level IN Input Data System ID 0 50 Index 1 10 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Display Name Up to 16 characters Refer to table 02 Year 00 99 00 03 Month 01 12 00 04 Day 01 31 00 Index Default 01 Power battery 02 Backup battery 03 Cooling fan 04 10 No setting ...

Page 911: ...Issue 4 0 SV9100 Programming Manual 2 871 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 912: ...on Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 52 System Alarm Save Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming and Web Pro Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Save All Alarm Reports Print All 1 Yes 02 Save New Alarm Reports Print All 1 Yes ...

Page 913: ...m alarm Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 53 System Alarm Clear Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data System ID 0 50 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Clear All Alarm Reports All Clear 1 Yes ...

Page 914: ... of all users of the Web Pro who is logging in the system after data is changed in the setting 0 65535 80 02 PC Pro TCP Port Number The port number of TCP of the PC programming of SV9100 is set The port number of new TCP is not reflected from the PC professional to the logout of the user of the PC professional who is logging in the system after data is changed in the setting 0 65535 8000 03 PC Web...

Page 915: ...se Program 90 55 Free License Select to validate the Free License Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 55 Free License Select Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Start Free License 0 Stop 1 Start ...

Page 916: ... 90 56 NTP Setup to set the NTP Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 56 NTP Setup Level IN Item No Item Input Data Default 01 NTP Synchronize 0 No 1 Yes 0 02 Server Address Up to 39 characters IPv4 form xxx xxx xxx xxx No setting ...

Page 917: ...nd to make the recovery data Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 57 Backup Recovery Data Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Data ID 1 5 Item No Item Input Data 01 Backup Recovery Data Backup Dial 1 press Transfer Press Transfer to cancel ...

Page 918: ...nd is executed the system restarts automatically Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 58 Restore Recovery Data Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Data ID 1 5 Item No Item Input Data 01 Restore Recovery Data Restore Reset Dial 1 press Transfer Press Transfer to cancel ...

Page 919: ... memory of the GCD CP10 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 59 Delete Recovery Data Level SA NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Data ID 1 5 Item No Item Input Data 01 Delete Recovery Data Delete Dial 1 press Transfer Press Transfer to cancel ...

Page 920: ... display layer status information for T1 PRI BRI CD CCTA packages Conditions This Program is Read Only Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 60 T1 ISDN Layer Status Information Level IN Slot No 1 24 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Link Status No link 0 Link N A No card seen in slot N A ...

Page 921: ... the new package cannot be assigned Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 61 Manual Slot Install Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data System ID 1 50 Slot No 1 24 Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Install 0 None 1 Router 2 PVA NAT 3 Server Blade 0 ...

Page 922: ...security ID of the GCD CP10 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 62 Security ID Information Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Item No Item Display Data 01 Security ID 0 9 and A F 32 digits or less ...

Page 923: ...e Program 90 63 DT800 DT700 Control to adjust settings of the DT700 and DT800 Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 63 DT800 DT700 Control Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Priority Timer 0 255 80 ...

Page 924: ... Community Name Max 12 characters Public 03 Target Host 1 XX XX XX XX 0 0 0 0 04 Target Host 2 XX XX XX XX 0 0 0 0 05 Target Host 3 XX XX XX XX 0 0 0 0 06 Target Host 4 XX XX XX XX 0 0 0 0 07 Target Host 5 XX XX XX XX 0 0 0 0 08 Domain Name Max 255 characters None 09 Trap Set Message When set to Not Accept the trap message is sent to the SNMP application for Major and Minor alarms When set to Acce...

Page 925: ... Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 65 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Password Sets the authentication password when the 1st Party CTI application is connected to the system via a NAT router If a password is not set the system does not certify it Up to 16 characters nec i ...

Page 926: ... None Feature Cross Reference None Program 90 Maintenance Program 90 68 Side Tone Auto Setup Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Adjustment Start Related PRGs 14 01 07 81 07 01 21 01 05 21 01 06 21 06 06 21 05 07 No Setting 1 400 02 1 Digit Data Dial 1 Digit 0 ...

Page 927: ...up Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Port Number Assign the port number used for Outbound IP Connection programming 1 65535 8000 02 IP Address Assign the IP Address that the system will use for TCP establishment request to I E the IP address of the PC with the waiting PC Programming 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 03 Caller ID Assign Caller ID number of the system to compare w...

Page 928: ...Maintenance Program 90 73 Line Load Control Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default 01 Line Load Control 0 Off 1 On 0 02 CPU Load Factor Low Level Restriction 30 100 90 03 Surveillance Seconds Low Level Restriction 1 10 6 04 CPU Load Factor High Level Restriction 30 100 95 05 Surveillance Seconds High Level Restriction 1 10 3 06 CPU Load Factor High Level Restriction 30 100 50 ...

Page 929: ...ta Default 01 LAN Link Speed of CPU This program shows the speed duplex mode of CPU LAN Link This is a read only program 0 No Link 1 1Gbps Full Duplex 2 1Gbps Half Duplex 3 100Mbps Full Duplex 4 100Mbps Half Duplex 5 10Mbps Full Duplex 6 10Mbps Half Duplex 0 02 LAN Link Speed of VoIP This program shows the speed duplex mode of VoIP DB LAN Link This is a read only program 0 No Link 1 1Gbps Full Dup...

Page 930: ...Issue 4 0 2 890 Program 90 Maintenance Program ...

Page 931: ...n trunk group or other number from which the data is to be copied For Trunk Base Trunk Port Number 1 400 For Trunk Group Base Trunk Group Number 1 100 For Extension Base Extension Number up to eight digits For Department Group Base Department Group Number 1 64 For DSS DSS Console Number 1 32 Destination Number From Enter the first extension trunk group or other number to which the information is t...

Page 932: ... for Trunks 21 12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk 21 21 Toll Restriction for Trunks 21 22 CO Message Waiting Indication 22 02 Incoming Service Type Setup 22 03 Trunk Ring Tone Setup 22 05 IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk 22 08 Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL IRG 31 05 Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker 81 07 Analog Trunk CODEC Filter Setup Program No Program Name Note...

Page 933: ...15 18 Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options 15 20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment 15 25 DESI less Page Setup 20 06 Class of Service for Extension 20 29 Timer Class for Extension 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions 21 11 Hotline Assignment 23 02 Call Pickup Groups 23 03 Ringing Line Preference 23 04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions 24 ...

Page 934: ...en trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the terminal displays as DUPLICATE DATA It is recommended to either clear these non existent keys or copy only from an extension that has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied Feature Cross Reference None Program No Program Name Note 30 01 DSS Console Operation Mode...

Page 935: ...xtension number of the first port is not deleted Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 92 Copy Program 92 02 Delete All Extension Numbers Level IN NOTE This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Extension No Delete Yes 1 Dial 1 Transfer key Only press Transfer key is canceled ...

Page 936: ... available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Input Data Item No Item Input Data 01 Source Number Enter the port number from where the data is to be copied 02 Destination Number From Enter the first port number where the information is to be copied 03 Destination Number To Enter the last port number where the information is to be copied If the information is to be copied...

Page 937: ...xtension Number Up to eight characters 02 2nd Extension Number Program Number Program Name 11 02 Extension Numbering 12 05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions 13 03 Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions 13 06 Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name 15 01 Extension Basic Data Setup 15 02 Multi Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 15 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 15 06 Trun...

Page 938: ... Toll Restriction Class for Extension 21 07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup 21 10 Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions 21 11 Hotline Assignment 21 13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 21 15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 21 18 IP Trunk H 323 Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 21 19 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 21 20 SIP Trun...

Page 939: ... Service 26 07 LCR Cost Center Code Table 31 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 41 02 Agent Extension Assignment for Group 41 17 Login Mode Setup 42 02 Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup 43 33 Print Table for Extension 43 37 Fixed Call Restrict Table Setup 82 14 MLT Handset Headset Gain Control 90 28 User Programming Password Setup 92 05 Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup Program Number Pro...

Page 940: ...to allow Extension Data Swap Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None Program 92 Copy Program 92 05 Extension Data Swap Password Level IN Input Data Extension 1 960 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Related Programming 01 Password Password required per station when using the station swap feature Fixed four digits No setting at default 11 15 12 ...

Page 941: ...gh PC Programming Input Data Program Number XX XX Item No Item Input Data 01 Source Number Each extension port 1 960 PRG 11 02 Each virtual extension port 1 512 PRG 11 04 Each ACI port number 1 96 PRG 11 06 Each extension group 1 64 PRG 11 07 Each ACI group 1 64 PRG 11 08 Each group 1 64 PRG 11 17 02 Destination Number From 03 Destination Number To Program Number Program Name 11 02 Extension Numbe...

Page 942: ...Issue 4 0 2 902 Program 92 Copy Program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 943: ... not through PC Programming Input Data Program Number XX XX Item No Item Input Data 01 Destination Number From Each extension port 1 960 PRG 11 02 Each virtual extension port 1 512 PRG 11 04 Each ACI port number 1 96 PRG 11 06 Each extension group 1 64 PRG 11 07 Each ACI group 1 64 PRG 11 08 Each group 1 64 PRG 11 17 02 Destination Number To Program Number Program Name 11 02 Extension Numbering 11...

Page 944: ...Issue 4 0 2 904 Program 92 Copy Program Conditions None Feature Cross Reference None ...

Page 945: ...ature Cross Reference None Program 93 System Information 93 01 Day Night Mode Information Level IN Input Data Night Mode Service Group 1 32 default 1 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Day Night Mode Read only Indicates current day night mode per night mode service group 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2 3 Mode 3 4 Mode 4 5 Mode 5 6 Mode 6 7 Mode 7 8 Mode 8 None ...

Page 946: ... Information 93 02 Trunk Information Level IN Input Data Trunk No 001 400 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Automatic Transfer to Transfer Read only Indicates Automatic Trunk Transfer setting status 0 Disable 1 Enable Disable 11 10 06 02 Trunk Port Disable by Service Code Read only Indicates the Trunk Port Disable Busy Out status 0 Disable 1 Enable Disable 11 10 27 ...

Page 947: ...nging 2 Call Forwarding when No Answer 3 Call Forwarding All Call None 11 11 01 11 11 03 11 11 04 11 11 05 02 Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring All Call No Answer Read only Indicates Call Forward All No Answer BothRing destination number set per extension 0 9 P R Up to 24 digits None 11 11 01 11 11 03 11 11 04 11 11 05 03 Call Forward Busy Read only Indicates Call Forward Busy setting stat...

Page 948: ...xtension Number Up to 8 digits None 11 11 09 11 11 10 11 11 11 09 Message Waiting Rcv Read only Indicates extension number when left Message Waiting Extension Number Up to 8 digits None 11 11 09 11 11 10 11 11 11 10 Alarm Clock 1 Read only Indicates Alarm Clock 1 setting status 0 Disable 1 Enable None 11 11 12 11 Preset time at Alarm 1 Read only Indicates the time set in Alarm Clock 1 Time set in ...

Page 949: ...xtension 0 Disable 1 Enable None 11 11 19 17 Dial Block Read only Indicates Dial Block setting status per extension 0 Disable 1 Enable None 11 11 33 18 Repeat Dial Read only Indicates Repeat Dial setting status per extension 0 Disable 1 Enable None 19 Headset Mode Switching Read only Indicates Headset Mode Switching setting status per extension 0 Disable 1 Enable None 11 11 65 20 Headset Ringing M...

Page 950: ...m 93 System Information 93 04 Redial List Level IN Input Data Extension 1 960 Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Redial Data Read only Indicates the number stored in Outgoing call history Dial Data 1 9 0 P R Up to 24 digits None 15 02 13 15 02 39 02 Name Read Only Indicates the name stored in Outgoing call history Up to 12 characters None 15 01 01 13 04 02 ...

Page 951: ... Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 Set Automatic transfer at Department Group Call Read only Indicates Automatic transfer setting status per Department Group 0 Disable 1 Enable None 11 11 25 02 Set Delayed Transfer at Department Group Call Read only Indicates Delayed transfer setting status per Department Group 0 Disable 1 Enable None 11 11 28 03 Set DND at Department G...

Page 952: ...am 93 System Information 93 06 IP Address List for 1st Party CTI Connection Level IN Input Data Item No Item Input Data Default Related Program 01 IP Address of the 1st Party CTI Client Read only Indicates IP Address of 1st Party CTI client IP Address xxx xxx xxx xxx None 02 Availability of 1st Party CTI Connection Read only Indicates Availability of 1st Party CTI client connection 0 Not Available...

Page 953: ......

Page 954: ...Programming Manual NEC Corporation of America Issue 4 0 SV9100 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for Univerge SV9100

Brand: YASKAWA SIEMENS Pages: 373

Brand: Waterway Pages: 8

Brand: Polycom Pages: 36

Brand: Ramsey Electronics Pages: 2

Brand: Daewoo Pages: 35

Brand: Nakamichi Pages: 14

Brand: Gemini Pages: 7

Brand: Magnetic Autocontrol Pages: 132

Brand: Steg Pages: 9

Stealthbox SB-F-FOC5DR/10TW3

Brand: JL Audio Pages: 6

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 27

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 32

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 40

Brand: Sound Projections Pages: 2

Brand: Sharp Pages: 2

Brand: Sharp Pages: 2

Brand: Sharp Pages: 2

Brand: Sharp Pages: 16

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands